Sunteți pe pagina 1din 231

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................

1-1

2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Types...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .......................................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit .................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 2-5
3 Subrack .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Structure ................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Slot Assignment ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 3-7
4 Boards ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Board Appearance ................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 SF64/SL64 ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-7
4.3.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-8
4.4 SL16 ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-13
4.4.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-13
4.5 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ..................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-18
4.5.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-19
4.6 SL1/SLQ1 ............................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-22
4.6.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-23
4.6.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-24
4.7 SEP1/EU08/OU08/EU04/TSB8/TSB4 .................................................... 4-25
4.7.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-26
4.7.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-26
4.7.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-27
4.7.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 4-30
4.7.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-31
4.7.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-32
4.8 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 ................................................................................. 4-33
4.8.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-33
4.8.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-34
4.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-35
4.8.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 4-37
4.8.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-38
4.8.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-39
4.9 PL3/PD3/C34S/D34S ............................................................................. 4-40
4.9.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 4-40
4.9.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 4-40
4.9.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 4-42
4.9.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 4-44
4.9.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 4-46
4.9.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 4-46
4.10 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ............................................................... 4-47
4.10.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-47
4.10.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-48
4.10.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-49
4.10.4 Protection Configuration .............................................................. 4-51
4.10.5 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-53
4.10.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-53
4.11 EGS2 .................................................................................................... 4-54
4.11.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-54
4.11.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-56
4.11.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-57
4.11.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-59
4.11.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-60
4.12 EGT2 .................................................................................................... 4-61
4.12.1 Function ....................................................................................... 4-61
4.12.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-61
4.12.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-63
4.12.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-65
4.12.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-65
4.13 EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 ............................................................. 4-66
4.13.1 Function ....................................................................................... 4-67
4.13.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-68
4.13.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-69
4.13.4 Protection Configuration .............................................................. 4-72
4.13.5 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-73
4.13.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-74
4.14 EMR0 ................................................................................................... 4-75
4.14.1 Function ....................................................................................... 4-76
4.14.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-77
4.14.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-79
4.14.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-81
4.14.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-82
4.15 ADL4/ADQ1.......................................................................................... 4-83
4.15.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-84
4.15.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-84
4.15.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-86
4.15.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-87
4.15.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-88
4.16 LWX...................................................................................................... 4-89
4.16.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-89
4.16.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-90
4.16.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-91
4.16.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-93
4.17 MR2A/MR2C ........................................................................................ 4-95
4.17.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-95
4.17.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-96
4.17.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-96
4.17.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-98
4.18 BA2/BPA .............................................................................................. 4-99
4.18.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-99
4.18.2 Application ................................................................................... 4-99
4.18.3 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-100
4.18.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-101
4.18.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-102
4.19 COA...................................................................................................... 4-103
4.19.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-104
4.19.2 Application ................................................................................... 4-105
4.19.3 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-105
4.19.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-106
4.19.5 Installation .................................................................................... 4-110
4.19.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-111
4.20 DCU...................................................................................................... 4-112
4.20.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-112
4.20.2 Application ................................................................................... 4-112
4.20.3 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-113
4.20.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-113
4.20.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-115
4.21 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE ..................................................................... 4-116
4.21.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-116
4.21.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-117
4.21.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-118
4.21.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................. 4-121
4.21.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-121
4.22 SCC ...................................................................................................... 4-122
4.22.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-122
4.22.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-123
4.22.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-124
4.22.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-127
4.23 AUX ...................................................................................................... 4-128
4.23.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-128
4.23.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-128
4.23.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-129
4.23.4 DIP Switch and Jumper ............................................................... 4-133
4.23.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-133
4.24 PIU ....................................................................................................... 4-134
4.24.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-134
4.24.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-134
4.24.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-135
4.24.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-136
4.25 FAN ...................................................................................................... 4-137
4.25.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 4-137
4.25.2 Principle ....................................................................................... 4-138
4.25.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 4-138
4.25.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 4-139
5 Cables ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 Fiber Jumper .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Classification .................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Connector ...................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable ........................................................ 5-5
5.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ..................................... 5-5
5.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable...................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 Subrack Power Cable .................................................................... 5-8
5.2.4 HUB/COA Power Cable ................................................................. 5-9
5.3 Alarm Cable ............................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ................................................................. 5-10
5.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN
Subracks ................................................................................................. 5-12
5.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other
Subrack ................................................................................................... 5-13
5.3.4 Boolean Input/ Output Cable .......................................................... 5-15
5.4 Management Cable ................................................................................ 5-17
5.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................... 5-17
5.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable ....................................................................... 5-18
5.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable ........................................................ 5-19
5.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Wire ............................................................... 5-21
5.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ............................................................. 5-22
5.4.6 Straight Through Cable .................................................................. 5-23
5.4.7 Crossover Cable ............................................................................ 5-25
5.5 Signal Cable ........................................................................................... 5-26
5.5.1 75ohm E1 Cable ............................................................................ 5-26
5.5.2 120ohm E1 Cable .......................................................................... 5-28
5.5.3 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable .................................................................... 5-30
5.5.4 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable ............................... 5-31
5.6 Clock Cable ............................................................................................ 5-33
5.6.1 Clock Cable.................................................................................... 5-33
5.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ................................................. 5-35
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board ....................................... A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description ................................................................. A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description .................................................................... A-2
B Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................ B-1

C Abbreviations and Acronyms ..................................................................... C-1

Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI

OptiX OSN 3500


Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Manual

V100R002

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Manual

Manual Version T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21

Product Version V100R002

BOM 31250252

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,


TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their
respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Summary of Updates

This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of
contents.
Update History
Manual Version Notes
T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10 Initial field trial release

T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20 Initial commercial release

T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21 1. Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64 and COA are added.


2. The functions of Ethernet boards EFS4/EFS0/EGS2
are improved.
3. Classification and description of cables are improved.

Updates of Contents
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.21
Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2.

Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA.
The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved:
EGS2/EFS0/EFS4.

Chapter 5 Cables
Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.
Updates in Manual Version 1.20
Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are
added in the table 3-2.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,
MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary


OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

Contents

1 Equipment Architecture 1-1

2 Cabinet 2-1
2.1 Types 2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators 2-4
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit 2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters 2-5

3 Subrack 3-1
3.1 Structure 3-2
3.2 Slot Assignment 3-3
3.3 Technical Parameters 3-7

4 Boards 4-1
4.1 Board Classification 4-1
4.2 Board Appearance 4-2
4.3 SF64/SL64 4-3
4.3.1 Functions 4-3
4.3.2 Principle 4-4
4.3.3 Front Panel 4-5
4.3.4 Parameter Configuration 4-7
4.3.5 Technical Parameters 4-8
4.4 SL16 4-9
4.4.1 Functions 4-9
4.4.2 Principle 4-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

4.4.3 Front Panel 4-11


4.4.4 Parameter Configuration 4-13
4.4.5 Technical Parameters 4-13
4.5 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 4-14
4.5.1 Functions 4-15
4.5.2 Principle 4-15
4.5.3 Front Panel 4-16
4.5.4 Parameter Configuration 4-18
4.5.5 Technical Parameters 4-19
4.6 SL1/SLQ1 4-20
4.6.1 Functions 4-20
4.6.2 Principle 4-21
4.6.3 Front Panel 4-22
4.6.4 Parameter Configuration 4-23
4.6.5 Technical Parameters 4-24
4.7 SEP1/EU08/OU08/EU04/TSB8/TSB4 4-25
4.7.1 Functions 4-26
4.7.2 Principle 4-26
4.7.3 Front Panel 4-27
4.7.4 Protection Configuration 4-30
4.7.5 Parameter Configuration 4-31
4.7.6 Technical Parameters 4-32
4.8 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 4-33
4.8.1 Functions 4-33
4.8.2 Principle 4-34
4.8.3 Front Panel 4-35
4.8.4 Protection Configuration 4-37
4.8.5 Parameter Configuration 4-38
4.8.6 Technical Parameters 4-39
4.9 PL3/PD3/C34S/D34S 4-40
4.9.1 Functions 4-40
4.9.2 Principle 4-40
4.9.3 Front Panel 4-42
4.9.4 Protection Configuration 4-44
4.9.5 Parameter Configuration 4-46
4.9.6 Technical Parameters 4-46
4.10 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B 4-47

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

ii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

4.10.1 Functions 4-47


4.10.2 Principle 4-48
4.10.3 Front Panel 4-49
4.10.4 Protection Configuration 4-51
4.10.5 Parameter Configuration 4-53
4.10.6 Technical Parameters 4-53
4.11 EGS2 4-54
4.11.1 Functions 4-54
4.11.2 Principle 4-56
4.11.3 Front Panel 4-57
4.11.4 Parameter Configuration 4-59
4.11.5 Technical Parameters 4-60
4.12 EGT2 4-61
4.12.1 Function 4-61
4.12.2 Principle 4-61
4.12.3 Front Panel 4-63
4.12.4 Parameter Configuration 4-65
4.12.5 Technical Parameters 4-65
4.13 EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 4-66
4.13.1 Function 4-67
4.13.2 Principle 4-68
4.13.3 Front Panel 4-69
4.13.4 Protection Configuration 4-72
4.13.5 Parameter Configuration 4-73
4.13.6 Technical Parameters 4-74
4.14 EMR0 4-75
4.14.1 Function 4-76
4.14.2 Principle 4-77
4.14.3 Front Panel 4-79
4.14.4 Parameter Configuration 4-81
4.14.5 Technical Parameters 4-82
4.15 ADL4/ADQ1 4-83
4.15.1 Functions 4-84
4.15.2 Principle 4-84
4.15.3 Front Panel 4-86
4.15.4 Parameter Configuration 4-87
4.15.5 Technical Parameters 4-88

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

4.16 LWX 4-89


4.16.1 Functions 4-89
4.16.2 Principle 4-90
4.16.3 Front Panel 4-91
4.16.4 Technical Parameters 4-93
4.17 MR2A/MR2C 4-95
4.17.1 Functions 4-95
4.17.2 Principle 4-96
4.17.3 Front Panel 4-96
4.17.4 Technical Parameters 4-98
4.18 BA2/BPA 4-99
4.18.1 Functions 4-99
4.18.2 Application 4-99
4.18.3 Principle 4-100
4.18.4 Front Panel 4-101
4.18.5 Technical Parameters 4-102
4.19 COA 4-103
4.19.1 Functions 4-104
4.19.2 Application 4-105
4.19.3 Principle 4-105
4.19.4 Front Panel 4-106
4.19.5 Installation 4-110
4.19.6 Technical Parameters 4-111
4.20 DCU 4-112
4.20.1 Functions 4-112
4.20.2 Application 4-112
4.20.3 Principle 4-113
4.20.4 Front Panel 4-113
4.20.5 Technical Parameters 4-115
4.21 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE 4-116
4.21.1 Functions 4-116
4.21.2 Principle 4-117
4.21.3 Front Panel 4-118
4.21.4 Parameter Configuration 4-121
4.21.5 Technical Parameters 4-121
4.22 SCC 4-122
4.22.1 Functions 4-122

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iv
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

4.22.2 Principle 4-123


4.22.3 Front Panel 4-124
4.22.4 Technical Parameters 4-127
4.23 AUX 4-128
4.23.1 Functions 4-128
4.23.2 Principle 4-128
4.23.3 Front Panel 4-129
4.23.4 DIP Switch and Jumper 4-133
4.23.5 Technical Parameters 4-133
4.24 PIU 4-134
4.24.1 Functions 4-134
4.24.2 Principle 4-134
4.24.3 Front Panel 4-135
4.24.4 Technical Parameters 4-136
4.25 FAN 4-137
4.25.1 Functions 4-137
4.25.2 Principle 4-138
4.25.3 Front Panel 4-138
4.25.4 Technical Parameters 4-139

5 Cables 5-1
5.1 Fiber Jumper 5-1
5.1.1 Classification 5-1
5.1.2 Connector 5-2
5.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable 5-5
5.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable 5-5
5.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable 5-7
5.2.3 Subrack Power Cable 5-8
5.2.4 HUB/COA Power Cable 5-9
5.3 Alarm Cable 5-10
5.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable 5-10
5.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks 5-12
5.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack 5-13
5.3.4 Boolean Input/Output Cable 5-15
5.4 Management Cable 5-17
5.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable 5-17
5.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable 5-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

v
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Contents

5.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable 5-19


5.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Wire 5-21
5.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable 5-22
5.4.6 Straight Through Cable 5-23
5.4.7 Crossover Cable 5-25
5.5 Signal Cable 5-26
5.5.1 75 Ω E1 Cable 5-26
5.5.2 120Ω E1 Cable 5-28
5.5.3 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable 5-30
5.5.4 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable 5-31
5.6 Clock Cable 5-33
5.6.1 Clock Cable 5-33
5.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable 5-35

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board A-1


A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description A-2

B Power Consumption and Weight B-1

C Abbreviations and Acronyms C-1

Index i-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vi
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 1-2


Figure 2-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet 2-2
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet 2-3
Figure 2-3 Appearance of the power distribution unit 2-4
Figure 3-1 Front view of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-1
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-2
Figure 3-3 Slot assignment of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-3
Figure 4-1 Board appearance 4-3
Figure 4-2 The principle block diagram of the SL64 4-4
Figure 4-3 The front panel of the SF64 and SL64 4-6
Figure 4-4 The principle block diagram of the SL16 4-10
Figure 4-5 The front panel of the SL16 4-11
Figure 4-6 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 4-15
Figure 4-7 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 4-17
Figure 4-8 The principle block diagram of the SLQ1/SL1 4-21
Figure 4-9 The front panel of the SLQ1 and SL1 4-22
Figure 4-10 The principle block diagram of the SEP1 4-26
Figure 4-11 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4 4-28
Figure 4-12 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 4-30
Figure 4-13 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of two-group 1:3 TPS 4-31
Figure 4-14 The principle block diagram of the SPQ4 4-34
Figure 4-15 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04 4-35
Figure 4-16 TPS of the SPQ4 4-37
Figure 4-17 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of two-group 1:3 TPS 4-38
Figure 4-18 The principle block diagram of the PD3/PL3 4-41

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Figures

Figure 4-19 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals 4-41
Figure 4-20 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, D34S and C34S 4-42
Figure 4-21 1:3 TPS of the PD3 4-44
Figure 4-22 Slot configuration of working and protection boards in the case of 1:3 TPS protection 4-45
Figure 4-23 The principle block diagram of the PQ1/PQM 4-48
Figure 4-24 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals 4-48
Figure 4-25 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S and D12B 4-49
Figure 4-26 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 4-52
Figure 4-27 Slot configuration of working and protection boards in the case of 1:3 protection 4-53
Figure 4-28 The principle block diagram of the EGS2 4-56
Figure 4-29 The front panel of the EGS2. 4-57
Figure 4-30 Block diagram of the EGT2 4-62
Figure 4-31 Front panel of the EGT2 4-63
Figure 4-32 The principle block diagram of the EFS4/EFS0 4-68
Figure 4-33 Front panel of the EFS0, EFS4, ETF8, EFF8 and ETS8 4-70
Figure 4-34 TPS protection of the EFS0 4-72
Figure 4-35 Slot configuration of the working board and protection board (1:1 TPS protection) 4-72
Figure 4-36 The principle block diagram of EMR0 4-78
Figure 4-37 Front panels of the EMR0 4-79
Figure 4-38 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 4-85
Figure 4-39 Front panel diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 4-86
Figure 4-40 Functional block diagram of LWX 4-90
Figure 4-41 Front panel of the LWX 4-91
Figure 4-42 MR2A/MR2C serves as OTM station 4-95
Figure 4-43 MR2A/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals 4-96
Figure 4-44 Functional block diagram of the MR2A 4-96
Figure 4-45 Front panel of the MR2A 4-97
Figure 4-46 Positions of BA and PA in network 4-100
Figure 4-47 Principle block diagram of the BA2/BPA 4-100
Figure 4-48 The front panel of the BA2 and BPA 4-101
Figure 4-49 Appearance of the 61COA 4-104
Figure 4-50 Appearance of the 62COA 4-104
Figure 4-51 Application of Raman amplifer (62COA) 4-105
Figure 4-52 Principle block diagram of 61COA 4-106
Figure 4-53 Front panel of the 61COA 4-107
Figure 4-54 Front panel of the 62COA 4-107

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

viii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Figures

Figure 4-55 E2000 flange and fiber connector 4-108


Figure 4-56 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC 4-109
Figure 4-57 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet 4-111
Figure 4-58 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system 4-112
Figure 4-59 The principle block diagram of the DCU 4-113
Figure 4-60 The front panel of the DCU 4-114
Figure 4-61 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS 4-117
Figure 4-62 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 4-118
Figure 4-63 Configuratin of extended subracks 4-120
Figure 4-64 The principle block diagram of the SCC 4-123
Figure 4-65 The front panel of the SCC 4-125
Figure 4-66 The principle block diagram of the AUX 4-129
Figure 4-67 The front panel of the AUX 4-130
Figure 4-68 Pin assignment of RJ-45 4-132
Figure 4-69 Connection of alarm input, alarm concatenation, and alarm output 4-132
Figure 4-70 Cabinet alarm indicator connection 4-133
Figure 4-71 The principle block diagram of the PIU 4-134
Figure 4-72 The front panel of the PIU 4-135
Figure 4-73 The appearance of the FAN 4-137
Figure 4-74 The principle block diagram of the FAN 4-138
Figure 5-1 LC/PC optical interface 5-3
Figure 5-2 SC/PC Optical interface 5-4
Figure 5-3 FC/PC optical interface 5-4
Figure 5-4 E2000/APC optical interface 5-5
Figure 5-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable 5-5
Figure 5-6 Cabinet PGND power cable 5-6
Figure 5-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable 5-7
Figure 5-8 Structure of the subrack power cable 5-8
Figure 5-9 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable 5-9
Figure 5-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable 5-11
Figure 5-11 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks 5-12
Figure 5-12 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 5-14
Figure 5-13 Structure of the Boolean input/output cable 5-15
Figure 5-14 Structure of the OAM serial port cable 5-17
Figure 5-15 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 5-18
Figure 5-16 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 5-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

ix
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Figures

Figure 5-17 Structure of ordinary telephone wire 5-21


Figure 5-18 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable 5-22
Figure 5-19 Structure of straight through cable 5-24
Figure 5-20 Structure of the crossover cable 5-25
Figure 5-21 Structure of the 75 Ω E1 cable 5-26
Figure 5-22 Structure of the 120 Ω E1 cable 5-28
Figure 5-23 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable 5-30
Figure 5-24 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable 5-31
Figure 5-25 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable 5-33
Figure 5-26 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable 5-34
Figure 5-27 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 5-35
Figure 5-28 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 5-35

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

x
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Description of the cabinet indicators 2-4


Table 2-2 The wiring relation between the left and right output cable terminals 2-5
Table 2-3 The technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet 2-5
Table 3-1 Correspondence between the slots for interface boards and for processing boards 3-3
Table 3-2 The relation between slots and different boards 3-4
Table 4-1 Functional unit and contained boards 4-2
Table 4-2 Indicator description of SL64/SF64 4-7
Table 4-3 Relationship between C2 setting and service type 4-8
Table 4-4 Technical parameters of the SL64/SF64 4-8
Table 4-5 Indicator description of the SL16 4-12
Table 4-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service 4-13
Table 4-7 Technical parameters of the SL16 4-13
Table 4-8 Comparison between SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4 4-14
Table 4-9 Indicator description of SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4 4-17
Table 4-10 Relationship between C2 setting and service type 4-19
Table 4-11 Technical parameters of SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4 4-19
Table 4-12 Comparison between the SLQ1 and SL1 4-20
Table 4-13 Indicator description of the SLQ1 and SL1 4-22
Table 4-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type 4-24
Table 4-15 Technical parameters of the SLQ1 and SL1 4-24
Table 4-16 Access ability of SEP1 with different interface boards and PDH interface switching & bridging
boards 4-25
Table 4-17 Indicator description of the SEP1, TSB8 and TSB4 4-28
Table 4-18 The differences between the EU08, EU04 and OU08 4-29
Table 4-19 The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU04/EU08 and TSB4/TSB8 4-31

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xi
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Tables

Table 4-20 Relationship between C2 setting and service type 4-32


Table 4-21 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4 4-32
Table 4-22 Indicator description of SPQ4 4-35
Table 4-23 The interfaces on the MU04 4-36
Table 4-24 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04 and TSB8 4-38
Table 4-25 Relationship between C2 setting and service type 4-39
Table 4-26 Technical parameters of SPQ4 and MU04 4-39
Table 4-27 Comparison between PD3 and PL3 4-40
Table 4-28 Indicator description of the PD3 and PL3 4-43
Table 4-29 Interfaces of the D34S and C34S 4-44
Table 4-30 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of 1:3 TPS protection 4-45
Table 4-31 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, C34S/D34S and TSB8 4-46
Table 4-32 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, C34S and D34S 4-46
Table 4-33 Comparison between PQ1 and PQM 4-47
Table 4-34 Indicator description of PQ1 and PQM 4-50
Table 4-35 Comparison between D75S, D12S and D12B 4-51
Table 4-36 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of 1:8 TPS 4-52
Table 4-37 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 4-53
Table 4-38 indicator description of the EGS2 4-57
Table 4-39 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2 4-59
Table 4-40 Technical parameters of EGS2 4-60
Table 4-41 Indicator description of the EGT2 4-63
Table 4-42 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2 4-65
Table 4-43 Technical parameters of the EGT2 4-65
Table 4-44 Comparison between EFS4 and EFS0 4-66
Table 4-45 Indicator description of the EFS0 and EFS4 4-70
Table 4-46 Indicator description of RJ-45 interface 4-71
Table 4-47 Slot layout of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 4-73
Table 4-48 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on EFS4/EFS0 4-73
Table 4-49 Technical parameters of the EFS4, EFS0, EFT8, ETS8 and EFF8 4-74
Table 4-50 Some specifications of the EMR0 4-75
Table 4-51 Indicator description of EMR0 4-80
Table 4-52 Indicator description of RJ-45 interface 4-81
Table 4-53 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on EMR0 4-82
Table 4-54 Technical parameters of the EMR0 4-82
Table 4-55 Comparison between ADL4 and ADQ1 4-83

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Tables

Table 4-56 Indicators of the ADL4 and ADQ1 4-86


Table 4-57 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1 4-88
Table 4-58 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1 4-88
Table 4-59 Indicators of the LWX 4-91
Table 4-60 Interface of the LWX 4-92
Table 4-61 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 4-93
Table 4-62 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 4-93
Table 4-63 Technical parameters of the LWX 4-94
Table 4-64 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2C 4-97
Table 4-65 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2C 4-98
Table 4-66 Comparison between BA2 and BPA 4-99
Table 4-67 Indicator description of the BA2 and BPA 4-101
Table 4-68 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA 4-102
Table 4-69 Indicator description of the 61COA/62COA 4-108
Table 4-70 Relation between output alarm and interface pin 4-110
Table 4-71 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA 4-111
Table 4-72 Technical parameters of the DCU 4-115
Table 4-73 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 4-116
Table 4-74 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 4-119
Table 4-75 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS 4-120
Table 4-76 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 4-121
Table 4-77 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame 4-124
Table 4-78 Switch description of the SCC 4-125
Table 4-79 Indicator description of the SCC 4-126
Table 4-80 Technical parameters of the SCC 4-127
Table 4-81 Indicator description of the AUX 4-130
Table 4-82 Interface description of the AUX 4-131
Table 4-83 Jumper J9 setting 4-133
Table 4-84 Technical parameters of the AUX 4-133
Table 4-85 Interfaces on PIU front panel 4-135
Table 4-86 Technical parameters of the PIU 4-136
Table 4-87 Indicator description of the fan box 4-138
Table 4-88 Technical parameters of the FAN 4-139
Table 5-1 Classification of fiber jumper 5-1
Table 5-2 Classification of fiber connector 5-3
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of subrack power cable 5-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xiii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Tables

Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable 5-10


Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable 5-11
Table 5-6 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks 5-12
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 5-14
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of Boolean input/output cable 5-16
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable 5-17
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 5-19
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 5-20
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire 5-21
Table 5-13 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable 5-23
Table 5-14 Pin assignment of the straight through cable 5-24
Table 5-15 Pin assignment of crossover cable 5-25
Table 5-16 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω E1 cable 5-27
Table 5-17 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω E1 cable 5-29
Table 5-18 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable 5-31
Table 5-19 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable 5-34
Table 5-20 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable 5-35

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xiv
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual About This Manual

About This Manual

Related Manuals
Manual Volume Usage
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent System Introduces the functionality,
Optical Transmission Description structure, performance,
System Technical Manual specifications, and theory of the
product.

Networking and Introduces the networking,


Application configuration and application of the
product.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Introduces the hardware of the


Optical Transmission product, including cabinet, subrack,
System Hardware power, fan, board, and a variety of
Description Manual interfaces.

OptiX OSN Introduces the way of data


3500/2500/1500 Intelligent configuring on the T2000.
Optical Transmission
System Service
Configuration Guide

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Guides the on-site installation of the


Optical Transmission product and provides the
System Installation Manual information of the structural parts.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Introduces equipment


Optical Transmission commissioning process, including
System Commissioning hardware, software, service
Guide operation.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xv
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual About This Manual

Manual Volume Usage


OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Troubleshooting Guides the analysis and
Optical Transmission troubleshooting of common faults.
System Maintenance Alarm and
Manual Performance
Event

Routine
Maintenance

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Covers all the preceding manuals.


Optical Transmission Acrobat Reader is attached.
System Electronic
Documentation (CD-ROM)

Organization
The manual is organized as follows:
Chapter Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Introduces the Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Architecture

Chapter 2 Cabinet Describes the dimensions, appearance, technical


specifications, and the configuration of a few cabinets of the
system.

Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces in detail the subracks in terms of principle,


structure, interface and index.

Chapter 4 Boards Introduces the boards in terms of function, theory, front


panel, and technical specifications.

Chapter 5 Cables Introduces the cables of OptiX OSN 3500.

Appendix A ~ Appendix Includes three appendices: Table of Indicators, Power


C Consumption and Weight of Boards, and Abbreviations.
The appendices provide a quick search means to useful
information.

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for:
„ Network administrator
„ Maintenance engineer
„ Provisioning engineer
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xvi
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual About This Manual

Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description
A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.
Warning

A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment


Caution damage or loss of data.

Important An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an
Note undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary
information.

Note A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful,


non-critical information.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xvii
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 1 Equipment Architecture

1 Equipment Architecture

This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.


The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, subrack, boards, and cables, as shown
in Figure 1-1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 1 Equipment Architecture

1. Subrack 2. Cabinet 3. Boards


Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet

2 Cabinet

This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the


configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500.
2.1 Types
The ETSI cabinet can be selected for the OptiX OSN 3500.
The appearance of the ETSI cabinet is shown in Figure 2-1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet

Figure 2-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet

2.2 Cabinet Configuration


There are indicators and a power distribution unit in the ETSI cabinet, as shown in 0.
1

2
Critical Major Minor Power

Pow er distribution
unit

1. Cabinet indicators 2. Power distribution unit


Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet

In addition, up to two case-shape optical amplifier (COAs) can be installed in the ETSI
cabinet as required.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators


Table 2-1 shows the description of the cabinet indicators.
Table 2-1 Description of the cabinet indicators
Indicator Status Description
Power indicator (green) On The cabinet is powered on.

Off The cabinet is not powered on.

Critical alarm indicator (red) On There is a critical alarm.

Off There is no critical alarm.

Major alarm indicator (orange) On There is a major alarm.

Off There is no major alarm.

Minor alarm indicator (yellow) On There is a minor alarm.

Off There is no minor alarm.

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit


Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.

RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

INPUT
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A

1. Grounding stud 2. PGND 3. RTN1(+)


4. RTN2(+) 5. NEG1(–) 6. NEG2(–)
7. Left output cable terminal 8. Right output cable terminal
Figure 2-3 Appearance of the power distribution unit

Left output cable terminal provides power to the PIU board on the left of the cabinet.
Right output cable terminal provides power to the PIU board on the right of the
cabinet.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet

Table 2-2 shows the wiring relation between the left and right output cable terminals.
Table 2-2 The wiring relation between the left and right output cable terminals
Left Corresponding subrack Right Corresponding subrack and PIU
terminal and PIU board terminal board
1 The left PIU board of the 1 The right PIU board of the first
first subrack subrack

2 The left PIU board of the 2 The right PIU board of the second
second subrack subrack

3 The left PIU board of the 3 The right PIU board of the third
third subrack subrack

4 The left PIU board of the 4 The right PIU board of the fourth
fourth subrack subrack

Note:
To the OptiX OSN 3500, normally only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use. Terminals 3 and
4 can provide power for other equipment, such as COA.

2.3 Technical Parameters


Table 2-3 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 2-3 The technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of subracks can be equipped
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 60 1

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 64 1

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 70.4 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 101 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 80 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 112.3 2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-5
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

3 Subrack

This chapter introduces the structure and technical parameters of the subrack.
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 is shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Front view of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

3.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board
area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-2.

1. Board area 2. Fan area 3. Fiber routing area


Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

„ Board area: for all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500


„ Fan area: for three fan modules, providing heat dissipation function
„ Fiber routing area: for fiber cable routing

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

3.2 Slot Assignment


The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has a upper and a lower layer. The upper layer
contains 19 slots for interface boards. The lower layer contains 18 slots for processing
boards. Figure 3-3 shows the slot assignment.
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

P P A
I I U
U U X

FAN FAN FAN

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X X S S
C C C C
S S C C

Fiber routing

Figure 3-3 Slot assignment of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

2. Slots for Interface Boards


„ Service interface boards: slots 19–26, slots 29–36
„ Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37
„ Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28

3. Slots for Processing Boards


„ Service processing boards: slots 1–8 and slots 11–16
„ XCS boards: slots 9–10
„ SCC boards: slots 17–18 (Slot 17 can also hold service processing board)

4. Slots for Processing Boards and Corresponding Interface Boards


Table 3-1 shows the correspondence between the slots for interface boards and those
for processing boards.
Table 3-1 Correspondence between the slots for interface boards and for processing boards
Slot for processing boards Slot for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2 Slots 19, 20

Slot 3 Slots 21, 22

Slot 4 Slots 23, 24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

Slot for processing boards Slot for corresponding interface boards


Slot 5 Slots 25, 26

Slot 13 Slots 29, 30

Slot 14 Slots 31, 32

Slot 15 Slots 33 34

Slot 16 Slots 35, 36

5. Boards and the Corresponding Slots


The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity
depending on the type of cross-connect board. Table 3-2 shows the board-slot relation
in the two cross-connect configurations.
Table 3-2 The relation between slots and different boards
Board Full name Slots available (80 Gbit/s Slots available (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity) cross-connect capacity)
SF64 STM-64 optical Slots 7, 8, 11, 12 Slots 8, 11
interface board with
FEC

SL64 STM-64 optical Slots 7, 8, 11, 12 Slots 8, 11


interface board

SL16 STM-16 optical Slots 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, Slots 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13
interface board 14

SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical Slots 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, Slots 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13
interface board 14

SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13


interface board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17

SL4 STM-4 optical Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


interface board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


interface board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

SL1 STM-1 optical Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


interface board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

SEP1 STM-1 line Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13,


(Note) processing board 14, 15, 16 14, 15, 16

SEP STM-1 line Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15,
(Note) processing board 16 16
(working with
interface board)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

Board Full name Slots available (80 Gbit/s Slots available (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity) cross-connect capacity)
BA2/ Optical booster Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
BPA amplifier 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
board/Optical
booster &
pre-amplifier board

DCU Dispersion Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


compensation 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
board

LWX Arbitrary bit rate Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


wavelength 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
conversion unit

MR2A Two-channel optical Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


add/drop & 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
multiplex board

MR2C Two-channel optical Slot 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, Slot 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,
add/drop & 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
multiplex board 34, 35, 36 34, 35, 36

SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15,
processing board 16 16

PD3 6 x E3/DS3 Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15,
processing board 16 16

PL3 3 x E3/DS3 Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15,
processing board 16 16

PQ1 63 x E1 processing Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14,


board 15, 16 15, 16

PQM 63 x T1/E1 Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14,


processing board 15, 16 15 16

EGS2 2-port Gigabit Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


Ethernet optical 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
interface board with
Lanswitch

EFS0 Fast Ethernet Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15,
interface board with 16 16
Lanswitch

EFS4 4-port fast Ethernet Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


interface board with 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Lanswitch

EGT2 2-port Gigabit Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,


Ethernet 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
transparent
transmission board

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-5
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

Board Full name Slots available (80 Gbit/s Slots available (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity) cross-connect capacity)
EMR0 12FE + 1GE Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13, Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13,
resilient Ethernet 14, 15, 16 14, 15, 16
ring board

ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13


processing board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17

ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, Slots 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13


processing board 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17

EU08 8 x STM-1 electrical Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Not support
interface board 31, 33, 35

OU08 8 x STM-1 optical Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Not support
interface board 31, 33, 35

EU04 4 x STM-1 electrical Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
interface board 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35

TSB8 8 x electrical Slots 19, 20, 35, 36 Slots 19, 20, 35, 36
interface switching
and bridging board

TSB4 4 x electrical Slots 19, 35 Slots 19, 35


interface switching
and bridging board

MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
electrical interface 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
board

D34S 6 x E3/DS3 PDH Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
interface switching 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
board

C34S 3 x E3/DS3 PDH Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
interface switching 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
board

D75S 32 x 75 Ω E1/T1 Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
PDH interface 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, 32, 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, 32,
switching board 33, 34, 35, 36 33, 34, 35, 36

D12S 32 x 120 Ω E1/T1 Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
PDH interface 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, /32, 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, /32,
switching board 33, 34, 35, 36 33, 34, 35, 36

D12B 32 x E1/T1 interface Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, Slots 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
board 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, /32, 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, 31, /32,
33, 34, 35, 36 33, 34, 35, 36

ETF8 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
Ethernet twisted 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
pair interface board

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-6
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack

Board Full name Slots available (80 Gbit/s Slots available (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity) cross-connect capacity)
ETS8 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Slots 21, 33 Slots 21, 33
Ethernet twisted
pair switching and
bridging board

EFF8 8 x 100 Mbit/s Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29,
Ethernet optical 31, 33, 35 31, 33, 35
interface board

SCC System control & Slots 17, 18 Slots 17, 18


communication
board

AUX System auxiliary Slot 37 Slot 37


interface board

GXCS Cross-connect and None Slots 9, 10


timing unit (40
Gbit/s/5 Gbit/s)

EXCS Cross-connect and Slots 9, 10 None


timing unit (80
Gbit/s/5 Gbit/s)

UXCSA Cross-connect and Slots 9, 10 None


/UXCS timing unit (80
B Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s)

XCE Cross-connect and Slots 9, 10 Slots 9, 10


timing unit (1.25
Gbit/s)

PIU Power interface unit Slots 27, 28 Slots 27, 28

FAN Fan board None None

COA Case-shaped None None


optical amplifier
Note: The SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 or SEP on the T2000. It is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly
from the front panel or as SEP when working with the interface board.

3.3 Technical Parameters


Dimensions 722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight 23 kg (including backplane, three fans and two PIU boards)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-7
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4 Boards

This chapter introduces board classification, board appearance, and specifications.


The specifications include:
„ Functions
„ Principle
„ Front panel
„ Parameter configuration
„ Technical parameters
4.1 Board Classification
The OptiX OSN 3500 boards are classified into the following types:
„ SDH functional unit
„ PDH functional unit
„ Ethernet functional unit
„ ATM functional unit
„ Built-in DWDM unit
„ Cross-connect and synchronous timing unit
„ SCC unit
„ Auxiliary unit
„ Power unit
„ Fan unit
„ Others
Table 4-1 shows the functional units and their contained boards.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-1 Functional unit and contained boards


Unit name Contained boards
SDH functional unit SF64, SL64, SL16, SLQ4, SLD4, SL4, SLQ1, SL1, SEP1,
SEP, EU08, OU08, EU04

PDH functional unit SPQ4, MU04, PD3, PL3, D34S, C34S, PQ1, PQM, D75S,
D12S, D12B, TSB4, TSB8

Ethernet functional unit EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, ETF8, EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ETS8

ATM functional unit ADL4, ADQ1

Built-in DWDm unit LWX, MR2A, MR2C

Cross-connect and GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, XCE


synchronous timing unit

SCC unit SCC/GSCC

Auxiliary unit AUX

Power unit PIU

Fan unit FAN

Others BA2, BPA, DCU, COA

4.2 Board Appearance

Caution:
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD
wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.

The appearance of some OptiX OSN 3500 boards is shown in Figure 4-1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

1. Optical interface 2. Ejector lever 3. Printed circuit board


Figure 4-1 Board appearance

Warning:
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface,
lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.

4.3 SF64/SL64
The SL64/SF64 is the 1 x STM-64 optical interface board, responsible for processing
STM-64 optical signal. SF64 supports forward error correction (FEC) function.
When the subrack cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the SL64/SF64 can be seated
in slots 7, 8, 11 and 12. When the subrack cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the
SL64/SF64 can be seated in slots 8 and 11.
4.3.1 Functions
„ Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal and support STM-64-4C
concatenated services.
„ Support I-64.1, S-64.2b, L64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA
and DCU) optical module, with ITU-T G.691 compliant optical interface for different
transmission distances.
„ Support fixed wavelength output, so that it can be connected with the multiplex unit
of dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) equipment directly without the
wavelength conversion unit.
„ Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber ring multiplex
section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP).
„ Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two
MSP rings.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

„ Capable of processing multiplex sets of K byte. One SL64/SF64 board can support
up to two MSP rings.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
„ Support in-service query of board information and optical power.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.3.2 Principle
Figure 4-2 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.
Backplane

O/E
STM-64 Cross-connect unit
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O scrambler
module
conversion module
STM-64 Cross-connect unit
module

Logic
control SCC
module

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V
+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V

Figure 4-2 The principle block diagram of the SL64

1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-64 optical signal into STM-64
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-64 electrical signal to the frame synchronization and scrambler
module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received STM-64
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and then sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received STM-64
signal, and demultiplexes it into 64 channels of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is sent to
the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. In Transmit Direction
The 64 channels of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
STM-64 signal in the overhead processing unit and sent to the frame synchronous
scrambler module after being inserted with the overhead byte.
The frame synchronous scrambler module performs parallel/serial conversion for the
received STM-64 electrical signal and then sends it to the E/O conversion module
after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-64 electrical signal into
STM-64 optical signal and sends it to the fiber for transmission.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
This unit generates information about timing clock and frame header required by the
SL64/SF64, implements ALS function, realizes pass-through of orderwire and ECC
bytes between the two optical interface boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is
not in position, and switch active/standby cross-connect board when the active one is
faulty.
„ Power module
Provide the board with various required voltages.
4.3.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SL64/SF64 is shown in Figure 4-3.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-5
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-3 The front panel of the SF64 and SL64

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the SL64/SF64 is shown in Table 4-2.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-6
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-2 Indicator description of SL64/SF64


Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and The board hardware is mismatched.


off for 100ms
alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the service is


not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or the


and green) FPGA upload is normal, or the board software
initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and Board software is being uploaded to FLASH or


off for 100ms FGPA.
alternatively, green

On for 300ms and The board software is initializing, and is in BIOS


off for 300ms boot stage.
alternatively, green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the FPGA


configuration is lost, resulting in upload and
initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs.
yellow and
green) On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service configured or no power supply.

2. Interface
On the SL64/SF64, there is one pair of swappable LC optical interfaces for
transmitting and receiving STM-64 optical signal. The swappable optical module is
easy to be maintained.
4.3.4 Parameter Configuration
The major parameters required by the SL64/SF64 are as follows.
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-7
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 4-3 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.
Table 4-3 Relationship between C2 setting and service type
Service type Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34/45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.3.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SL64/SF64 are shown in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Technical parameters of the SL64/SF64
Parameter Description
SF64 SL64
Rate 10.709 Gbit/s 9.953 Gbit/s

Processing 1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service


capability

Line code pattern Non return to zero (NRZ)

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.12

Power 32
consumption (W)

Optical module I-64.1 S-64.2b L-64.2b Le-64.2 Ls-64.2 V-64.2b


type (BA+PA+DC
U)

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550 1550 1550 1550.12

Transmission 0–2 2–40 30–70 30–70 80 70–120


distance (km)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-8
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
SF64 SL64
Launched power –6 to 1 –1 to 2 10–14 1 to 4 3 to 5 12–15
(dBm)

Receiver –11 –14 –14 –19.5 –21 –23


sensitivity (dBm)

Receiver overload –1 –1 –3 –9 –9 –7
(dBm)

Maximum 6.6 800 1600 1200 1600 800


dispersion
tolerance (ps/nm)

Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


operating condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.4 SL16
The SL16 is the STM-16 optical interface board, responsible for STM-16 optical signal
processing.
When the subrack cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the SL16 can be seated in
slots 5–8 and 11–14. When the subrack cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, SL16 can
be seated in slots 6–8 and 11–13.
4.4.1 Functions
„ Receive/Transmit one channel of STM-16 optical signal, and support VC-4-4C,
VC-4-8C, and VC-4-16C concatenated services.
„ Support I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA) and
U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical modules, with ITU-T G.957 and
G.691compliant optical interface for different transmission distances.
„ Support fixed wavelength output, so that it can be connected with the multiplex unit
of WDM equipment directly without the wavelength conversion unit.
„ Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional
MSP, ring, linear MSP and SNCP.
„ Capable of processing multiple sets of K byte. One SL16 board can support up to
two MS rings protection.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-9
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

„ Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support ALS function.
„ Support in-service query of board information and optical power.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.4.2 Principle
Figure 4-4 shows the principle block diagram of the SL16.
Backplane

O/E
STM-16 Cross-connect unit
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O scrambler
module
conversion module
STM-16 Cross-connect unit
module

Logic
control SCC
module

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V
+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V

Figure 4-4 The principle block diagram of the SL16

1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-16 optical signal into STM-16
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-16 electrical signal to the frame synchronous scrambler module,
where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received STM-16
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received STM-16
signal, and demultiplexes it into 64 channels of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction
The 16 channels of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
STM-16 signal in the overhead processing unit and sent to the frame synchronous
scrambler module after being inserted with the overhead byte.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-10
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

The frame synchronous scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for


the received STM-16 electrical signal and then sends it to the E/O conversion module
after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-16 electrical signal into
STM-16 optical signal and sends it to the fiber for transmission.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
This unit generates information about timing clock and frame header required by the
SL16, implements ALS function, realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC
bytes between the two optical interface boards constituting the ADM, and switch
active/standby cross-connect board when the active one is faulty.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the board.
4.4.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SL16 is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 The front panel of the SL16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-11
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the SL16 is shown in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Indicator description of the SL16
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Upload of board software to FLASH


green) or the FPGA upload is normal, or the
board software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, green FLASH or FGPA.

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and
300ms alternatively, green is in BIOS boot stage.

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting
in upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, yellow On, green Service is normal, and no service


and green) alarm occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to


service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to


service.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

2. Interface
On the SL16, there is one pair of swappable LC optical interfaces for transmitting and
receiving STM-16 optical signal. The swappable optical module is easy to be
maintained.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-12
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.4.4 Parameter Configuration


The major parameters required by the SL16 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 4-6 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.
Table 4-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service
Service type Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.4.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SL16 are shown in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7 Technical parameters of the SL16
Parameter Description
Rate 2488320 kbit/s

Processing 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service


capability

Line code NRZ


pattern

Connector LC

Dimensions 262.05 x 220 x 25.4


(mm)

Weight (kg) 1.10

Power 20
consumption
(W)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-13
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Optical module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 Le-16.2Je V-16.2J U-16.2 Je
type e (BA) (BA+PA)

Wavelength 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550 1550 1550.12


(nm)

Transmission 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100 80–140 140–170


distance (km)

Launched –10 to –3 –5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7 14 14
power (dBm)

Receiver –18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 –33


sensitivity
(dBm)

Receiver –3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 –10
overload
(dBm)

Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


operating Humidity: 10%–90%
condition

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating Humidity: 5%–95%
condition

Environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


for storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


for Humidity: 10%–100%
transportation

4.5 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 optical interface board, the SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 optical
interface board, and the SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 optical interface board. All are
responsible for STM-4 optical signal processing.
Table 4-8 shows the differences between these three optical interface boards.
Table 4-8 Comparison between SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Comparison SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Processing capability 1 x STM-4 2 x STM-4 4 x STM-4

Front panel One pair of LC Two pairs of LC Four pairs of LC


optical interfaces optical interfaces optical interfaces

Slot available Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 5–8, 11–14
(Cross-connect capacity is
80 Gbit/s)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-14
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Comparison SL4 SLD4 SLQ4


Slot available Slots 1–8, 11–16 Slots 6–8, 11–13 Slots 6–8, 11–13
(Cross-connect capacity is
40 Gbit/s)

4.5.1 Functions
„ Receive/Transmit STM-4 optical interface
„ Support VC-4-4C concatenated services.
„ Support I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 standard optical module, with ITU-T
G.957 compliant optical interface for different transmission distances.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support ALS function.
„ Support in-service query of the board information and optical power.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.5.2 Principle
Figure 4-6 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4
optical signal is processed).
Backplane

O/E
STM-4 Cross-connect unit
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O scrambler
module
conversion module
STM-4 Cross-connect unit
module

Logic
control SCC
module

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V
+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V

Figure 4-6 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-15
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous scrambler module, where
the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4 electrical
signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module,
where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received STM-4
signal, and demultiplexes it into 4 channels of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction
The 4 channels of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into STM-4
signal in the overhead processing unit and sent to the frame synchronous scrambler
module after being inserted with the overhead byte.
The frame synchronous scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for
the received STM-4 electrical signal and then sends it to the E/O conversion module
after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4
optical signal and sends it to the fiber for transmission.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
This unit generates information about timing clock and frame header required by the
SL4/SLD4/SLQ4, implements ALS function, realizes the pass-through of orderwire
and ECC bytes between the two optical interface boards constituting the ADM, and
switch active/standby cross-connect board when the active one is faulty.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the board.
4.5.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 is shown in Figure 4-7.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-16
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

SLQ4 SLD4 SL4


Figure 4-7 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4

On the front panel of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4, there are indicators indicating the
working status and optical interfaces receiving/transmitting optical signal.

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the SL4/ SLD4/ SLQ4 is shown in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9 Indicator description of SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red On, green The board works normally.
and green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and The board hardware is mismatched.


off for 100ms
alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-17
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or the FPGA
and green) upload is normal, or the board software initialization
is normal.

On for 100ms and Board software is being uploaded to FLASH or


off for 100ms FGPA.
alternatively,
green

On for 300ms and The board software is initializing, and is in BIOS


off for 300ms boot stage.
alternatively,
green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the FPGA


configuration is lost, resulting in upload and
initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs.
yellow and
green) On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

2. Interface
On the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4, there are swappable LC optical interfaces for
transmitting and receiving STM-4 optical signal. The swappable optical module is
easy to be maintained.
4.5.4 Parameter Configuration
The major parameters required by the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If
mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm
and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 4-10 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-18
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-10 Relationship between C2 setting and service type


Service type C2 setting
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.5.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4 are shown in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11 Technical parameters of SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
Parameter Description
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Rate 622080 kbit/s

Processing capability 1 x STM-4 2 x STM-4 4 x STM-4

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.00 1.01 1.04

Power consumption 15 15 16
(W)

Optical module type I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550

Transmission distance 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100


(km)

Launched power –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2


(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity –23 –28 –28 –28 –33


(dBm)

Receiver overload –8 –8 –8 –8 –8
(dBm)

Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-19
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
SL4 SLD4 SLQ4
Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.6 SL1/SLQ1
The SLQ1 is the 4 x STM-1 optical interface board; and the SL1 is the 1 x STM-1
optical interface board. Both are responsible for processing STM-1 optical signal.
Table 4-12 shows the difference between these two optical interface boards.
Table 4-12 Comparison between the SLQ1 and SL1
Comparison SL1 SLQ1
Processing capability 1 x STM-1 4 x STM-1

Front panel One pair of LC optical Four pairs of LC optical


interfaces interfaces

Slot available (Cross-connect Slots 1–8 and 11–17 Slots 1–8 and 11–17
capacity is 80 Gbit/s)

Slot available (Cross-connect Slots 1–8 and 11–16 Slots 1–8 and 11–16
capacity is 40 Gbit/s)

4.6.1 Functions
„ The SLQ1 and SL1 access and process four and one channel of STM-1 optical
signal respectively.
„ Support I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical module, with ITU-T G.957
compliant optical interface for different transmission distances.
„ Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber unidirectional MSP, linear
MSP and SNCP.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support ALS function.
„ Support in-service query of the board information and optical power.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-20
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.6.2 Principle
Figure 4-8 shows the principle block diagram of the SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1 signal is
processed).
Backplane

O/E
STM-1 Cross-connect unit
conversion Frame
module Overhead
synchronous
processing
E/O scrambler
module
conversion module
STM-1 Cross-connect unit
module

Logic
control SCC
module

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V
+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V

Figure 4-8 The principle block diagram of the SLQ1/SL1

1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous scrambler module, where
the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical
signal, converts it into parallel signal, and then sends it to the overhead processing
module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received STM-1
signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into STM-1
signal in the overhead processing unit and sent to the frame synchronous scrambler
module after being inserted with the overhead byte.
The frame synchronous scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for
the received STM-1 electrical signal and then sends it to the E/O conversion module
after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1
optical signal and sends it to the fiber for transmission.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-21
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
This unit generates information about timing clock and frame header required by the
SLQ1/SL1, implements ALS function, realizes pass-through of orderwire and ECC
bytes between the two optical interface boards constituting the ADM, and switch
active/standby cross-connect board when the active one is faulty.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the board.
4.6.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ1 and SL1 is shown in Figure 4-9.

SLQ1 SL1
Figure 4-9 The front panel of the SLQ1 and SL1

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the SLQ1 and SL1 is shown in Table 4-13.
Table 4-13 Indicator description of the SLQ1 and SL1
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red On, green The board works normally.
and green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-22
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.
100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or the


and green) FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to FLASH
100ms alternatively, or FGPA.
green

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is in
300ms alternatively, BIOS boot stage.
green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the FPGA


configuration is lost, resulting in upload and
initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

2. Interface
On the front panels of the SLQ1 and SL1, there are LC optical interfaces for
transmitting and receiving STM-1 optical signal. The swappable optical module is
easy to be maintained.
4.6.4 Parameter Configuration
The major parameters required by the SLQ1 and SL1 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-23
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 4-14 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.
Table 4-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type
Service type C2 setting
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.6.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SLQ1 and SL1 are shown in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15 Technical parameters of the SLQ1 and SL1
Parameter Description
SLQ1 SL1
Rate 155520 kbit/s

Processing capability 4 x STM-1 1 x STM-1

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.04 1.00

Power consumption 15 14
(W)

Optical module type I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550

Transmission distance 0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80


(km)

Launched power –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0


(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity –23 –28 –34 –34


(dBm)

Receiver overload –8 –8 –10 –10


(dBm)

Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-24
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
SLQ1 SL1
Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.7 SEP1/EU08/OU08/EU04/TSB8/TSB4
The SEP1 is the 8 x STM-1 line processing board, with two STM-1 electrical interfaces
on the front panel.
When service led out directly from the front panel, the SEP1 can be seated in slots
1–6 and 13–16. When working with the interface board, the SEP1 can be seated in
slots 2–5 and 13–16.
The EU08, OU08 and EU04 are interface boards, while TSB8 and TSB4 are PDH
interface switching & bridging board.
When used with different interface boards and PDH interface switching & bridging
boards, the SEP1 has different access ability. Refer to Table 4-16.

Caution:
The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with
interface boards.

Table 4-16 Access ability of SEP1 with different interface boards and PDH interface switching & bridging
boards
When used with Function
None Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.

EU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.

EU04 Access and process 4 x STM-1 electrical signals.

OU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.

EU08 and TSB8 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve
1:N (N≤3) TPS.

EU04 and TSB4 Access and process 4 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve
1:N (N≤3) TPS.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-25
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Caution:
The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s.

4.7.1 Functions
„ Process STM-1 signal.
„ Support various protection schemes such as linear MSP, MSP and SNCP.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support in-service query of the board information.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.7.2 Principle
The principle block diagram of the SEP1 is shown in Figure 4-10 (1 x STM-1 signal is
processed).
Backplane

STM-1O/E signal
Cross-connect unit
Data Frame
Overhead
Interface recovery synchronous
processing
module module scrambler
module
recovers module
STM-1O/E signal Cross-connect unit

Logic
control SCC
module

+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V(Standby)

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V

Figure 4-10 The principle block diagram of the SEP1

1. In Receive Direction
The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signal (for optical signal, O/E
conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signal. Then the
cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signal are sent to the frame synchronous
scrambler module.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-26
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

signal, converts it into parallel signal, and then sends it to the overhead processing
module.
The overhead processing module extracts the overhead byte from the STM-1 signal
and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to
the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
STM-1 signal in the overhead processing unit and sent to the frame synchronous
scrambler module after being inserted with the overhead byte.
The frame synchronous scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for
the received STM-1 electrical signal and then sends it to the E/O conversion module
after scrambling.
The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signal to the cable for transmission.
For optical signals, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the signal is sent to
the optical fiber after E/O conversion.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
Communicate with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet interface, to collect
and report alarm & performance events, and interpret and process the configuration
commands delivered from the NM.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the board.
4.7.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4 is shown in Figure
4-11.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-27
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

TSB8 TSB4

TSB8 TSB4

Figure 4-11 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4

2. Indicator
The indicator description of the SEP1, TSB8 and TSB4 is shown in Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 Indicator description of the SEP1, TSB8 and TSB4
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or


and green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, green FLASH or FGPA.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-28
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is
300ms alternatively, green in BIOS boot stage.

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

3. Interface
The SEP1 provides two pairs of 75 ohm SMB interfaces. When used alone, the board
can access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.
The SEP1 can also be used with the EU08, EU04 or OU08 to implement different
functions. When the SEP1 works with the interface boards, two interfaces on its front
panel are unavailable.
The differences between the EU08, EU04 and OU08 are shown in Table 4-18.
Table 4-18 The differences between the EU08, EU04 and OU08
Item EU08 EU04 OU08
Number of 8 4 8
interfaces

Processing 8 x STM-1 4 x STM-1 8 x STM-1 signal


capability electrical signals electrical signals signals

Interface type 8 pairs of SMB 4 pairs of SMB 8 pairs of SC or LC


electrical interface electrical interface optical interface

Slot available Slots 19, 21, 23, Slots 19, 21, 23, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25,
(Cross-connect 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 29, 31, 33, 35
capacity is 80
Gbit/s)

Slot available Not support Slots 19, 21, 23, Not support
(Cross-connect 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
capacity is 40
Gbit/s)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-29
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.7.4 Protection Configuration


When used with EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N (N≤3) TPS for 8 x STM-1
electrical signals.
When used with EU04 and TSB4, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N (N≤3) TPS for 4 x STM-1
electrical signals.

1. Protection Principle
Figure 4-12 shows the 1:3 TPS when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and TSB8.
8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(e)
Switch control
signal

TSB8 EU08 EU08 EU08

1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2

Cross
connect
board

SLOT 9/10
Protection Working Working Working
SEP1 SEP1 SEP1 SEP1
Fail

SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5


Figure 4-12 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1

Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08.
Switching status
When a working SEP1 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected
in the following manners:
„ When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
„ When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
„ When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

2. Board Configuration
When the equipment is configured as SEP1 two-group 1:3 TPS, the relation between
the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 4-13.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-30
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Protection2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Working2
Working2
Working2

Working1
Working1
Working1
Protection1
X X S S
C C C C
S S C C

Figure 4-13 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of two-group 1:3 TPS

In the figure, slot 2 is now protecting slots 3, 4, and 5, and the slot 16 is now protecting
slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU04/EU08 and TSB4/TSB8 is shown in Table
4-19.
Table 4-19 The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU04/EU08 and TSB4/TSB8
Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
Protection SEP1 Slot 2 Slot 16

TSB4/TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35

Working SEP1 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15

EU04/EU08 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

Note:
TPS is a protection scheme at device level. When the working board fails, the
accessed signal will be protected by being bridged to the protection board. In this way,
triggering of more complex protection at network level such as MSP and SNCP can be
avoided, thus improving the equipment reliability.

4.7.5 Parameter Configuration


The major parameters (set through the NM) required by the SEP1 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-31
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 4-20 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.
Table 4-20 Relationship between C2 setting and service type
Service type C2 setting
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.7.6 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4 are
shown in Table 4-21.
Table 4-21 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, EU04, OU08, TSB8 and TSB4
Parameter Description
SEP1 EU08 EU04 OU08 TSB8 TSB4
Rate 155520 kbit/s

Access 2x 8x 4x 8x None None


capability STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
electrical electrical electrical optical
signals signals signals signals

Processing 8x None None None TPS TPS


capability STM-1

Line code CMI or NRZ


pattern

Connector SMB SMB SMB LC or SC None None

Dimensions 262.05 x 262.05 x 110 x 22


(mm) 220 x
25.4

Weight (kg) 0.95 0.41 0.40 0.41 0.28 0.28

Power 17 11 6 6 5 2.5
consumption
(W)

Optical module - I-1, -


type S-1.1

Wavelength - 1310 -
(nm)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-32
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
SEP1 EU08 EU04 OU08 TSB8 TSB4
Transmission - 0–15 -
distance (km)

Launched power - –15 to -


(dBm) –8

Receiver - –38 -
sensitivity (dBm)

Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


operating Humidity: 10%–90%
condition

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating Humidity: 5%–95%
condition

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.8 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
The SPQ4 is the 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board; and the MU04 is the 4 x E4/STM-1
interface board.
The SPQ4 can work with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical
signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 can work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N (N≤3) TPS to
the SPQ4.
The SPQ4 can be seated in slots 2–5 and 13–16.
4.8.1 Functions
„ Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. All paths can be set for either
E4 or STM-1 signal.
„ The STM-1 service supports such protection schemes as MSP and SNCP.
„ The E4 service supports SNCP protection.
„ Support SOH byte processing, including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1 and D1–12.
„ Support POH byte processing, including J1, B3, C2, G1 and H4.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support in-service query of the board information.
„ Support configuration of such bytes as D1–D12, E1 and E2 to transparent
transmission or into other unused overhead bytes.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-33
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.8.2 Principle
Figure 4-14 shows the principle block diagram of the SPQ4.
Backplane

E4/STM-1
electrical signal Cross-connect unit
Data Frame
Interface Overhead
recovery synchronous
module processing
module scrambler
(MU04) module
E4/STM-1 recovers module
electrical signal Cross-connect unit

Logic
control SCC
module

+3.3V(Standby) +3.3V(Standby)

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V

Figure 4-14 The principle block diagram of the SPQ4

1. In Receive Direction
The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signal, and then the data
recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then the clock signal and E4/STM-1
electrical signal are sent to the frame synchronous scrambler module.
The frame synchronous scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead byte from the received
E4/STM-1 signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4
signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
E4/STM-1 signal in the overhead processing unit and then sent to the frame
synchronous scrambler module after being inserted with the overhead byte.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion
for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signal and then sends it to the interface unit after
descrambling.
The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signal into the cable for
transmission.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Logic control module
This unit generates information about timing clock and frame header required by the
SL16, implements ALS function, realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC
bytes between the two optical interface boards constituting the ADM, and switch

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-34
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

active/standby cross-connect board when the active one is faulty.


„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
4.8.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04 is shown in Figure 4-15.

SPQ4 MU04
Figure 4-15 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the SPQ4 is shown in Table 4-22.
Table 4-22 Indicator description of SPQ4
Indicator Color and status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-35
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Color and status Description


Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or


and green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, green FLASH or FGPA.

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is
300ms alternatively, green in BIOS boot stage.

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

2. Interface
The SPQ4 does provide no interface. It works with the MU04 to input/output
E4/STM-1 signal.
The interfaces on the MU04 are described in Table 4-23.
Table 4-23 The interfaces on the MU04
Interface MU04
Access service 4 x E4/STM-1

Interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface

Interface type SMB

Slot available Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-36
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.8.4 Protection Configuration


The SPQ4 works with the MU04 and TSB8 to provide 1:3 TPS.

1. Protection Principle
Figure 4-16 introduces the protection principle of the SPQ4 (one group 1:3 TPS).
4 x E4/STM-1 4 x E4/STM-1 4 x E4/STM-1

TSB8 MU04 MU04 MU04 Switching


control signal

1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cross-
connect
unit

SLOT 9/10

Protection Working Working Working


SPQ4 SPQ4 SPQ4 SPQ4
Failure

SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5

Figure 4-16 TPS of the SPQ4

Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08.
Switching status
When a working SPQ4 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected
in the following manners:
„ When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
„ When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
„ When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

2. Board Configuration
When the equipment is configured as SPQ4 two-group 1:3 TPS, the relation between
the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 4-17.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-37
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Protection2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Working2
Working2

Working1
Working1
Working1
Protection1
Working2
X X S S
C C C C
S S C C

Figure 4-17 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of two-group 1:3 TPS

In the figure, slot 2 is now protecting slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 is now protecting
slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04 and TSB8 is shown in Table 4-24.
Table 4-24 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04 and TSB8
Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
Protection SPQ4 Slot 2 Slot 16

TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35

Working SPQ4 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15

MU04 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

Note:
TPS is a protection scheme at device level. When the working board fails, the
accessed signal will be protected by being bridged to the protection board. In this way,
triggering more complex protection at network level such as MSP and SNCP can be
avoided, thus improving the equipment reliability.

4.8.5 Parameter Configuration


The major parameters required by the SPQ4 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate HP_SLM

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-38
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.


Table 4-25 shows the relationship between C2 setting and service type.
Table 4-25 Relationship between C2 setting and service type
Service type C2 setting
E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

ATM ATM

No service Unequipped

4.8.6 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04 are shown in Table 4-26.
Table 4-26 Technical parameters of SPQ4 and MU04
Parameter Description
SPQ4 MU04
Rate 139264 kbit/s or 155520 kbit/s

Processing capability 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical Accessing 4 x E4/STM-1


signals electrical signals

Line code pattern CMI

Connector None SMB

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 262.05 x 110 x 22

Weight (kg) 0.91 0.41

Power consumption 24 2
(W)

Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C–45°C


condition Humidity:10%–90%

Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-39
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.9 PL3/PD3/C34S/D34S
The PL3 is the 3 x E3/DS3 processing board, and the PD3 is the 6 x E3/DS3
processing board.
The C34S is the 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board, and the D34S is the 6 x
E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
Table 4-27 shows the difference between PD3 and PL3.
Table 4-27 Comparison between PD3 and PL3
Board name PL3 PD3
Comparison
Processing capability 3 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3

Available slots Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, Slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, 16
16

Interface board C34S D34S

4.9.1 Functions
„ Process E3/DS3 electrical signal.
„ Provides 75 ohm unbalanced E3/DS3 interfaces in compliance with ITU-T G.703.
„ Supports two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS, with the switching time less than 50ms.
„ Support setting and query of all POH bytes at VC-3 level.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support in-service query of the board information.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.9.2 Principle
Figure 4-18 shows the principle block diagram of the PD3/PL3 (one channel of
E3/DS3 signal is input/output).

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-40
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Backplane

E3/DS3
D34S/D34S Cross-connect unit
Decoder Mapping
Interface
module
E3/DS3 De-
D34S/D34S Encoder
mapping Cross-connect unit

Logic
control SCC
module

+3.3V(Standby)
+5V
Power
+2.7V module -48V
+3.3V

Figure 4-18 The principle block diagram of the PD3/PL3

1. In Receive Direction
The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where
NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered and sent to the mapping module.
In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and
formed as VC-3 after channel overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing,
and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The
mapping process is shown in Figure 4-19.
x3
VC-4 TUG-3 TU-3

VC-3

C-3

44736 kbit/s
or
34368 kbit/s

Figure 4-19 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals

2. In Transmit Direction
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal
sent from the cross-connect unit and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or
DS3 signals are output.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-41
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

3. Auxiliary unit
„ Logic control module
Implement the communication between the PD3/PL3 and SCC. Report board
information, alarm and performance to the SCC and receive the configuration
command delivered from the SCC.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
4.9.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the PL3, PD3, D34S and C34S is shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, D34S and C34S

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-42
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Indicator
The indicator description of the PL3 and PD3 is shown in Table 4-28.
Table 4-28 Indicator description of the PD3 and PL3
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or


and green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, green FLASH or FGPA.

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is
300ms alternatively, green in BIOS boot stage.

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-43
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

3. Interface
The PL3 and PD3 provide no interface. It works with the interface board to
input/output E3/DS3 signal and achieves TPS.
The PL3 works with the C34S and PD3 works with the D34S.
The interfaces on the C34S and D34S are shown in Table 4-29.
Table 4-29 Interfaces of the D34S and C34S
Board name C34S D34S
Access capacity 6 x E3/DS3 3 x E3/DS3

Interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface


(SMB male) (SMB male)

Interface type SMB SMB

Processing board PL3 PD3

Slot available Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,
33, 35 35

4.9.4 Protection Configuration


The PL3 works with the C34S and TSB8 to achieve two-group 1:N (N≤3) protection.
The PD3 works with the D34S and TSB8 to achieve two-group 1:N (N≤3) protection.

1. Protection Principle
The protection principle of the PL3 is the same with that of the PD3. Figure 4-21
shows the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3.
6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3

TSB8 D34S D34S D34S Switching


control signal

1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cross-
connect
unit

SLOT 9/10

Protection Working Working Working


PD3 PD3 PD3 PD3
Failure

SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5

Figure 4-21 1:3 TPS of the PD3

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-44
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to
corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S.
Switching status
When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in
the following manners:
„ When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
„ When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
„ When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
D34S switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

2. Board Configuration
When the equipment is configured as PL3 or PD3 1:3 TPS, the relation between the
working board and protection board is shown in Table 4-30.
Table 4-30 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of 1:3 TPS protection
Working board Protection board Slot configuration
PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3) As shown in Figure 4-22.

PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Protection1
Working1
Working1
Working1

Working2
Working2
Working2
Protection2

X X S S
C C C C
S S C C

Figure 4-22 Slot configuration of working and protection boards in the case of 1:3 TPS protection

In the figure, slot 2 is now protecting slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 is now protecting
slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 is shown in Table 4-31.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-45
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-31 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, C34S/D34S and TSB8


Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16

PL3/PD3 (working board) Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15

TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35

C34S/D34S Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

4.9.5 Parameter Configuration


The major parameters required by the PL3/PD3 are as follows:
„ Load indication
When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select “Do not
load”. Otherwise, select “Load”
„ Tributary loopback
The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service
channel.
It belongs to diagnosis function. Using it will interrupt services on relevant channels.
„ Channel service type
E3 or DS3 can be selected in the NM according to the input service type.
4.9.6 Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, C34S and D34S are shown in Table 4-32.
Table 4-32 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, C34S and D34S
Parameter Description
PL3 PD3 C34S D34S
Rate 34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s

Processing capability 3 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3 None None

Line code pattern E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS

Connector None None SMB SMB

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 262.05 x 110 x 22

Weight (kg) 1.00 1.12 0.31 0.38

Power consumption (W) 15 19 2 2

Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-46
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
PL3 PD3 C34S D34S
Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.10 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
The PQ1 is the 63 x E1 processing board. The PQM is the 63 x E1/T1 processing
board. The D75S is the 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board. The D12S is
the 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board. The D12B is the 32 x 120
ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.
Table 4-33 shows the difference between PQ1 and PQM.
Table 4-33 Comparison between PQ1 and PQM
Board name PQ1 PQM
Comparison
Processing capability 63 x E1 63 x E1/T1

Slot available Slots 1–5, slots 13–16 Slots 1–5, slots 13–16

Interface board (providing 2 x D75S or 2 x D12S 2 x D12S


TPS)

Interface board (NOT 2 x D12B or 2 x D75S or 2 x D12B or 2 x D12S


providing TPS) 2 x D12S

4.10.1 Functions
„ The PQM processes 63 x E1/T1 signals, each of which can be configured as either
E1 or T1 independently through software. The PQ1 processes 63 x E1 signals.
„ Support 1:N (N≤8) TPS.
„ Support PP and SNCP, with the switching time less than 50ms.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces for fast fault location.
„ Support in-service query of the board information.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-47
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.10.2 Principle
Figure 4-23 shows the principle block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of E1/T1
signal is input/output).
Backplane

D75S/D12S/ E1/T1
Cross-connect unit
D12B Decoder Mapping
Interface
module
E1/T1 De-
D75S/D12S/ Encoder
mapping Cross-connect unit
D12B

Logic
control SCC
module

+3.3V(Standby)
+5V
Power
+2.7V module -48V
+3.3V

Figure 4-23 The principle block diagram of the PQ1/PQM

1. In Receive Direction
The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where
HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered and sent to the mapping
module.
In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and
formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer
processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing, and then sent to the
cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 4-24.
x3 x7 x3
VC-4 TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-12

VC-12

2048 kbit/s
C-12
12 or
1544 kbit/s

Figure 4-24 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-48
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. In Transmit Direction
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal
sent from the cross-connect unit and sends them to the encoder, where E1 or T1
signals are output.

3. Auxiliary unit
„ Logic control module
Implement the communication between the PQ1/PQM and SCC. Report board
information, alarms and performance to the SCC and receive the configuration
command delivered from the SCC.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
4.10.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S and D12B is shown in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S and D12B

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the PQ1 and PQM is shown in Table 4-34.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-49
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-34 Indicator description of PQ1 and PQM


Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and The board hardware is mismatched.


off for 100ms
alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the service is


not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or the
green) FPGA upload is normal, or the board software
initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and Board software is being uploaded to FLASH or


off for 100ms FGPA.
alternatively, green

On for 300ms and The board software is initializing, and is in


off for 300ms BIOS boot stage.
alternatively, green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the FPGA


configuration is lost, resulting in upload and
initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, yellow On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm
and green) occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service configured or no power supply.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-50
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Interface
The PQ1 and PQM provide no interface. They need to work with the D75S, D12S or
D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals.
Table 4-35 shows the difference between D75S, D12S and D12B.
Table 4-35 Comparison between D75S, D12S and D12B
Board name D75S D12S D12B
Comparison
Access capability 32 x E1 32 x E1/T1 32 x E1/T1

Interface 75 ohm 120 ohm 120 ohm balanced


unbalanced balanced interface
interface interface

Interface type DB44 DB44 DB44

Slot available Slots 19–26 and Slots 19–26 and Slots 19–26 and
29–36 29–36 29–36

4.10.4 Protection Configuration


The PQ1 works with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:8 protection.
The PQM works with the D12S to achieve 1:8 protection.

1. Protection Principle
The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 4-26
shows the protection principle of PQ1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-51
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
E1 protection bus
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S

D75S
D75S
E1
service bus

S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1
3 4 5 6
Failure

Protection Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working


PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1 PQ1

Detect board fault

Cross-connect and synchronous timing board


TPS switching
control bus

Figure 4-26 1:8 TPS for the PQ1

When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service
switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to
protection board, thus achieving the protection of services.

2. Board Configuration
When the equipment is configured as PQ1 or PQM with 1:8 TPS, the relation between
the working board and protection board is shown in Table 4-36.
Table 4-36 Relation between the working and protection board in the case of 1:8 TPS
Working board Protection board Slot configuration
PQ1 (75 ohm) PQ1 (75 ohm) As shown in Figure 4-27.

PQ1 (120 ohm) PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM

PQM PQM

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-52
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Protection

S S
Working
Working
Working
Working

Working
Working
Working
Working
X X
C C C C
S S C C

Figure 4-27 Slot configuration of working and protection boards in the case of 1:3 protection

The board in slot 1 is the protection board, which provides protection for the boards in
slot 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, or 16.
4.10.5 Parameter Configuration
Before using PQ1/PQM for running service, parameters should be set for it through
the NM.
„ J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access
point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the
transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status. Value of the J2 is “Huawei
SBS” by default.
4.10.6 Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B are shown in
Table 4-37.
Table 4-37 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Parameter Description
PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B
Rate 2048 1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s
kbit/s

Processing 63 x E1 63 x TPS TPS None


capability E1/T1 protection protection

Accessing 0 0 32 x E1 32 x 32 x E1/T1
capability E1/T1

Line code pattern E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

Connector None None DB44 DB44 DB44

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 262.05 x 110 x 22

Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01 0.35 0.35 0.31

Power 19 22 5.5 9 1
consumption (W)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-53
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B
Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
operating condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


storage Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


transportation Humidity: 10%–100%

4.11 EGS2
The EGS2, the 2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board, transparently
transmits and converges the GE service. The fast Ethernet (FE) service can be
converged into Gigabit Ethernet (GE) service and the Layer 2 switching can be
performed.
The EGS2 can be seated in slots 1–8 or 11–16. It supports bandwidth auto adaption
when inserted in different slot.
4.11.1 Functions
1. Port
„ Provide 2 1000BASE-SX/LX Ethernet optical interfaces with auto-negotiation
function (auto-negotiation function can be set to enabled or disabled). The GE
optical interface complies with IEEE 802.3z and the optical module adopts
hot-swappable LC connector. The transmission distance of the interfaces is 550 m
(multimode) or 10 km (single-mode). You can select the 40 km or 70 km optical
module as required in practice.
„ Support Ethnet II and IEEE 802.3 compliant service frame formats.
„ Support 64-byte to 9600-byte frames and the Jumbo frame of 9600 bytes.
„ Support IEEE802.3X compliant flow control.

2. Encapsulation and Mapping


„ Support bandwidth adjustment at 64 kbit/s and service mapping into VC-12 or
VC-3 level. Support a maximum uplink bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s.
„ Support a maximum of 48 VCTRUNK paths.
„ The service supports generic framing procedure (GFP) encapsulation.

3. EPL Service
„ Support port based transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual private line
service.
„ Support IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant virtual local area network (VLAN) and VLAN
convergence function. Support 4 k VLANs.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-54
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4. EPLAN Service
„ Support Layer 2-based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence.
„ Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address. The MAC
address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried
through T2000.
„ Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching.
„ Support broadcast and Internet group management protocol (IGMP) snooping
broadcast function.
„ Support broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree protocol,
compliant with IEEE 802.1w.
„ Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN data isolation.
„ Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32
and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB.

5. EVPL/EVPLAN Service
„ Support EVPL service with frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE
802.1q TAG or MPLS Martini OE.
„ The EVPL service supports port or port+VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and
forwarding.
„ Support EVPLAN service with encapsulation format being MPLS Martini OE,
MPLS Martini OP, or VMAN.
„ Support static MAC route configuration.

6. QoS
„ Support port or port+VLAN based flow classification.
„ Support port based committed access rate (CAR) with 64 kbit/s as the unit for rate
adjustment, and priority setting and queue adjustment of flow.
„ Support link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) to achieve higher transmission
bandwidth utility.

7. Others
„ Support service convergence from GE to GE port. The EGS2 can work with the
EFS0 and EFS4 to converge the FE service into GE service
„ Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
„ Support link error pass through (LPT) function.
„ Support inloop and outloop for fast fault location.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events and support port level Ethernet
performance monitoring for convenient equipment management and maintenance.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-55
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.11.2 Principle
Figure 4-28 shows the principle block diagram of the EGS2 (one channel of Gigabit
Ethernet signal is taken as an example).
Backplane

1000M Cross-connect unit


Interface Service
Encapsula- Mapping
processing processing
tion module module
module module
1000M Cross-connect unit

Control and
communication SCC
module

+3.3V(Standby)

+5V
Power
+2.7V -48V
module
+3.3V

Figure 4-28 The principle block diagram of the EGS2

1. In Receive Direction
The interface processing module accesses the 1000BASE-SX/LX signals from
external Ethernet equipments such as Ethernet switch and router and performs
decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to
the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. And
flow classification is performed according to the service type and configuration
requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and Ethernet/VLAN are
supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added according to the service for
mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the GFP encapsulation is
performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or
VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent to the
encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs flow classification
according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation,
adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are
performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from the
Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface processing
module.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-56
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Control and communication module
Mainly functions control, communication and service configuration of the board.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
4.11.3 Front Panel
The front panel of the EGS2 is shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 The front panel of the EGS2.

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the EGS2 is shown in Table 4-38.
Table 4-38 indicator description of the EGS2
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails or is
mismatched.

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-57
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


PROG (red On, green Loading or initializing board software
and green) is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Loading board software.


100ms alternately, green

On for 300ms and off for Initializing board software.


300ms alternately, green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading


or initializing board software fails.

Off No power supply

SRV (red, On, green The service is normal, and no service


yellow and alarm occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

LINK1 (green) On The link between the first GE port and


the opposite equipment is established.

Off The link between the first GE port and


the opposite equipment is not
established.

ACT1 (orange) Flashing There are data being exchanged


between the first GE port and the
opposite equipment.

Off There is no data being exchanged


between the first GE port and the
opposite equipment.

LINK2 (green) On The link between the second GE port


and the opposite equipment is
established.

Off The link between the second GE port


and the opposite equipment is not
established.

ACT2 (orange) Flashing There are data being exchanged


between the first GE port and the
opposite equipment.

Off There is no data being exchanged


between the second GE port and the
opposite equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-58
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Interface
The EGS2 supports two pluggable LC optical interface, and 1000Base-SX and
1000Base-LX interfaces.
The interface transmission distance reaches 550 m (multimode) or 10 km
(single-mode).
4.11.4 Parameter Configuration
The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
„ Ethernet interface setting
Table 4-39 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2.
Table 4-39 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2
Parameter Description
Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG
flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware. the port transmits packets
with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag
flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to
the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards
those with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid,the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets
without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID VLAN ID of the port.

Working mode It can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The


Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work
under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be
lost and the rate may decrease, or the service may be completely
interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal
port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of
the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL
and EVPLAN services.

LCAS enable Whether to enable LCAS.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-59
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Maximum packet Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
length

Mapping protocol It is preferable to select the default – GFP mapping protocol.

4.11.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the EGS2 are shown in Table 4-40.
Table 4-40 Technical parameters of EGS2
Parameter Description
Rate 1000 Mbit/s

Processing capability 2 x 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet signals

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC (SFP)

Interface specifications In compliance with IEEE 802.3z

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.04

Power consumption (W) 39

Optical module type 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Central wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Transmission distance (km) 0–0.55 0–10

Mean launched power (dBm) –9.5 to –4 –11.5 to –3

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –17 –19

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-60
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.12 EGT2
The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board that functions
to transmit GE service transparently. The EGT2 can be inserted in slots 1–8 or slots
11–16. It supports bandwidth auto adaption when inserted in different slot.
4.12.1 Function
1. Port
„ Provide 2 1000BASE-SX/LX GE optical interfaces with auto-negotiation function
and the auto-negotiation function can be set to enabled or disabled. The interfaces
comply with IEEE802.3z standards.
„ Adopt hot-swappable LC optical interfaces to support a transmission distance of
550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber.
„ Suport Ethnet II or IEEE 802.3 compliant service frame formats.
„ Support 64-byte to 9600-byte frames and the Jumbo frame of 9600 bytes.
„ Support GE port-based IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control.
„ Support port-based transparent transmission.

2. Encapsulation and Mapping


„ Support encapsulation modes GFP, LAPS and HDLC.
„ Support mapping modes VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv and VC-4-Xv, and support a
maximum uplink bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s.
„ Support a maximum of two VCTRUNK paths.

3. QoS
„ Support link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) and is compliant with ITU-T
G.7042 recommendation, to dynamically increase/decrease and protect
bandwidth.

4. Others
„ Suport LPT function, which can be set to “enabled” or “disabled”.
„ Support inloop and outloop of all kinds for fast fault location.
„ Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events and support port level Ethernet
performance monitoring for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
4.12.2 Principle
Figure 4-30 takes a GE signal as an example to introduce the working principle of
EGT2.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-61
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Backplane

1000 M Service
Interface Encapsulation Mapping Cross-
processing connect
module module module
module unit
1000 M

Control and
communication SCC unit
module

+3.3 V (standby)

+1.5 V
+1.8 V Power
-48 V
+2.5 V module
+3.3 V

Figure 4-30 Block diagram of the EGT2

1. In Receiving Direction
The interface processing module accesses the 1000BASE-SX/LX signals from
external Ethernet equipment such as LAN switch and router and performs decoding
and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. And then it sends signals to the service
processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic
redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the
encapsulation module, HDLC, LAPS or GFP encapsulation is done to the Ethernet
frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module
and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmitting Direction
Demap the VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the
encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation,
adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the
interface processing module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the
signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Control and communication module
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-62
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.12.3 Front Panel


The front panel of the EGT2 is shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31 Front panel of the EGT2

1. Indicator
Table 4-41 lists the description of indicators on the EGT2.
Table 4-41 Indicator description of the EGT2
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails or is mismatched.

Off The board is not powered on, or the service


is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Loading or initializing board software is


green) normal.

On for 100ms and Loading board software.


off for 100ms
alternately, green

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-63
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


On for 300ms and Initializing board software.
off for 300ms
alternately, green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading or


initializing board software fails.

Off No power supply

SRV (red, yellow On, green The service is normal, and no service alarm
and green) occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs.

Off No service configured or no power supply.

LINK1 (green) On The link between the first GE port and the
opposite equipment is established.

Off The link between the first GE port and the


opposite equipment is not established.

ACT1 (orange) Flashing There are data being exchanged between


the first GE port and the opposite
equipment.

Off There is no data being exchanged between


the first GE port and the opposite
equipment.

LINK2 (green) On The link between the second GE port and


the opposite equipment is established.

Off The link between the second GE port and


the opposite equipment is not established.

ACT2 (orange) Flashing There are data being exchanged between


the first GE port and the opposite
equipment.

Off There is no data being exchanged between


the second GE port and the opposite
equipment.

2. Interface
There are two hot-swappable SFP optical interfaces on the front panel of EGT2,
supporting 1000Base-SX and 1000Base-LX.
The transmission distance of the multimode optical interface module can reach 550 m
and the transmission distance of single-mode optical interface module can reach 10
km.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-64
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.12.4 Parameter Configuration


Parameters to be configured for EGT2:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point
identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two
ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path
will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received. Once
mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and
insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
„ Ethernet interface setting
Table 4-42 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of EGT2.
Table 4-42 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2
Parameter Description
Working It can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet
mode interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same
fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the rate may
decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large
volume of traffic.

LCAS enable Whether to enable LCAS.

Maximum Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
packet length

Mapping Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP. It is preferable to select the
protocol default - GFP.

4.12.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the EGT2 are shown in Table 4-43.
Table 4-43 Technical parameters of the EGT2
Parameter Description
Rate 1000 Mbit/s

Processing capability 2 x 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet signals

Line code pattern NRZ

Optical interface type LC (SFP)

Interface specification IEEE 802.3z

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.9

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-65
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Power consumption (W) 23

Optical module type 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Central wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Transmission distance 0–550 0–10


(km)

Mean launched power –9.5 to –4 –11.5 to –3


(dBm)

Optical receiver sensitivity –17 –19


(dBm)

Long-term operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


condition Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


condition Humidity: 5%–95%

Storage environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


environment Humidity: 10%–100%

4.13 EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
„ The EFS4 is a 4-port fast Ethernet processing board with switching function.
„ The EFS0 is a 8-port fast Ethernet processing board with switching function.
„ The ETF8 is a 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board.
„ The EFF8 is a 8 x 100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board.
„ The ETS8 is a 8 x 100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair switching and bridging board.
The EFS4/EFS0 is responsible for transparent transmission, convergence and Layer
2 switching of the Ethernet signal.
Table 4-44 shows the differences between EFS4 and EFS0.
Table 4-44 Comparison between EFS4 and EFS0
Board EFS4 EFS0
Comparison item
Processing capability 4 x 10/100 Mbit/s 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s

Interface board None ETF8, EFF8 or ETS8

Slot (40 Gbit/s cross-connect Slots 1–8 and slots 11–16 Slots 2–5 and slots 13–16
capacity)

Slot (80 Gbit/s cross-connect Slots 1–8 and slots 11–17 Slots 2–5 and slots 13–16
capacity)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-66
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.13.1 Function
1. Port
„ Access and process 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet service.
„ ETF8 provides 8 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX ports (RJ-45) with auto-negotiation
function and the auto-negotiation function can be set to enabled or disabled. The
transmission distance is up to 100m.
„ EFF8 provides 8 x 100Base-FX FE optical interface (LC) with auto-negotiation
function and the auto-negotiation function can be set to enabled or disabled. The
maximum transmission distance is up to 2 km for multimode fiber and 15 km for
single-mode fiber.
„ The ETS8 supports all functions of the ETF8 as well as TPS protection for100M
Ethernet service
„ Support 64-byte to 9600-byte frames and the 9600-byteJumbo frame.
„ Support IEEE802.3X-compliant flow control.

2. Encapsulation and Mapping


„ Support 64 kbit/s bandwidth adjustment, VC-12 or VC-3 mapping and a maximum
uplink bandwidth of 1.25 Gbit/s.
„ Support GFP encapsulation.
„ Support a maximum of 24 VCTRUNK paths.

3. EPL
„ Support port based transparent transmission and port+VLAN private line service.
„ Support IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN and VLAN convergence function. Support
4 k VLANs.

4. EPLAN
„ Support Layer 2-based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence.
„ Support self-learning of source MAC address. The MAC address table is 16 k, and
the aging time of MAC address can be set and queried through T2000.
„ Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching.
„ Support broadcast and IGMP snooping multicast function.
„ Support broadcast message suppression function and rapid spanning tree
protocol, complaint with IEEE 802.1w.
„ Support VB+VLAN based data isolation.
„ Support creating/deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32,
and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB.

5. EVPL/EVPLAN
„ Support point-to-point and point-to-multipoint vitual private line service (MPLS L2
VPN).
„ Support EVPL service, with frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE
802.1q TAG, or MPLS MartiniOE.
„ The EVPL service supports MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on port or
port + VLAN.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-67
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

„ Support EVPLAN service with encapsulation format being MPLS Martini OE,
MPLS Martini OP, or VMAN.
„ Support static MAC route configuration.

6. QoS
„ Support port based CAR with 64 kbit/s as the unit for rate adjustment, and priority
setting and queue adjustment of flow.
„ Support port or port+VLAN based flow classification.
„ Support ITU-T G.7042 compliant LCAS to achieve dynamic increase/decrease and
protection of bandwidth.

7. Others
„ Work with the EGS2 to converge FE service into GE service.
„ Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame
„ Support link error pass through (LPT) function.
„ Support inloop and outloop of all kinds for fast fault location.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events and support port-level Ethernet
performance monitoring for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
4.13.2 Principle
Figure 4-32 takes a 100 Mbit/s signal as an example to introduce the working principle
of the EFS4/EFS0.
Backplane

100 M Service
Interface Encapsulation Mapping Cross-
processing connect
module module module
module unit
100 M

Control and
communication SCC unit
module

+3.3 V (standby)

+1.5 V
+1.8 V Power
-48 V
+2.5 V module
+3.3 V

Figure 4-32 The principle block diagram of the EFS4/EFS0

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-68
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

1. In Receiving Direction
The interface module accesses the 10Base-T/100Base-TX signals from external
Ethernet equipment such as LAN switch and router and performs decoding and
serial/parallel conversion to the signals. And then it sends signals to the service
processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, CRC
termination and Ethernet performance statistics. This module also performs flow
classification to signals based on the service mode and configuration requirement. It
supports MPLS packet, Layer 2 MPLS VPN packet and Ethernet/VLAN packet, and
the module adds Tunnel and VC labels to signals according to service configuration to
achieve service mapping and forwarding. At the encapsulation module, GFP
encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into
VC-12 or VC-3 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmitting Direction
Demap the VC-12 or VC-3 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the
encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment, performs flow classification
according to service mode and configuration requirement, and provides frame
delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics.
Finally, the interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the
signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Control and communication module
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
4.13.3 Front Panel
Figure 4-33 shows the front panel of the EFS0, EFS4, ETF8, ETS8 and EFF8.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-69
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

ETS8

ETS8

EFS0 EFS4 ETF8 EFF8 ETS8


Figure 4-33 Front panel of the EFS0, EFS4, ETF8, EFF8 and ETS8

1. Indicator
On the front panel of the EFS0 and EFS4, there are indicators to indicate the working
status of the board, as shown in Table 4-45.
Table 4-45 Indicator description of the EFS0 and EFS4
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware is faulty.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternately, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-70
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


PROG (red On, green Loading or initializing board software is
and green) normal.

On for 100ms and off for Loading board software.


100ms alternately, green

On for 300ms and off for Initializing board software.


300ms alternately, green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading or


initializing board software fails.

Off No power supply

SRV (red, On, green The service is normal, and no service


yellow and alarm occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

2. Interface
There are four RJ-45 interfaces on the front panel of EFS4: FE1, FE2, FE3 and FE4,
which input/output four channels of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet services.
No interface is available on the front panel of EFS0, so EFS0 needs to work with ETF8,
ETS8 or EFF8 to process eight channels of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet services.
ETF8, ETS8 and EFF8 can be inserted in slots 19–25, slots 29–35.
There are eight RJ-45 interfaces on the front panel of ETF8/ETS8: FE1, FE2, FE3,
FE4, FE5, FE6, FE7, FE8, which input/output eight channels of 10 Mbit/s or 100
Mbit/s Ethernet services. ETS8 also support service switching and bridge function for
TPS.
There are eight LC optical interfaces on the front panel of EFF8, which input/output
eight channels of 100 Mbit/s optical Ethernet services. Each interface on EFF8 has
two indicators: LINK and ACT, Table 4-46 shows the indicator description.
Table 4-46 Indicator description of RJ-45 interface
Indicator Status Description
LINK (green) On The fiber connects with the interface.

Off The fiber fails to connect with the interface.

ACT (orange) Flashing Exchanging data

Off No data is being exchanged.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-71
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.13.4 Protection Configuration


The EFS0 works with the ETS8 and TSB8 to achieve two groups of 1:1 protection for
10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical service.

1. Protection Principle
Figure 4-34 shows the principle of 1:1 TPS for the EFS0.
8 x 10M/100M

Switching
control signal
TSB8 ETS8

1 2 1 2
Cross-
connect
unit

SLOT 9/10

Protection Working
EFS0 EFS0

SLOT 2 SLOT 3

Figure 4-34 TPS protection of the EFS0

Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to
corresponding EFS0 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the ETS8.
Switching status
When a working board failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected
in the following manner:
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding ETS8
switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

2. Board Configuration
The slot configuration of the working board and protection board is shown in Figure
4-35.

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Protection1
Working1

Working2
Protection2

X X S S
C C C C
S S C C

Figure 4-35 Slot configuration of the working board and protection board (1:1 TPS protection)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-72
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3, and slot 16 is protecting slot 15.


The slot layout of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 4-47.
Table 4-47 Slot layout of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8
Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2
EFS0 (protection board) slot 2 slot 16

EFS0 (working board) slot 3 slot 15

TSB8 slot 19 slot 35

ETS8 slot 21 slot 33

4.13.5 Parameter Configuration


Parameters to be configured for EFS4/EFS0:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point
identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two
ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path
will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received. Once
mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and
insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
„ Ethernet interface setting
Table 4-48 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on
EFS4/EFS0.
Table 4-48 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on EFS4/EFS0
Parameter Description
Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG
flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits the packets
with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to
the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards
those with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag and attach a Tag flag to the packets without
the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID VLAN ID of the port.

Working mode It can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half/full-duplex or 100 Mbit/s


half/full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected
equipment should work under the same fixed working mode;
otherwise, the packet may be lost and the rate may decrease, or the
service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-73
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port
of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the
service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and
EVPLAN services.

LCAS enable Whether to enable LCAS.

Maximum Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
packet length

Mapping It is preferable to select the default – GFP mapping protocol.


protocol

4.13.6 Technical Parameters


Table 4-49 lists the technical parameters of the EFS4, EFS0, EFT8, EFT8 and EFF8.
Table 4-49 Technical parameters of the EFS4, EFS0, EFT8, ETS8 and EFF8
Parameter Description
EFS4 EFS0 EFT8/ETS8 EFF8
Rate 100 Mbit/s

Access 4 x 10 Mbit/s or 100 0 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s


capability Mbit/s electrical interface optical interface

Processing 4 x 10 Mbit/s or 100 8 x 10 Mbit/s or 100 0 0


capability Mbit/s Mbit/s

Line code Manchester encoding signal (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 encoding signal (100 Mbit/s)
pattern

Interface type RJ-45 None RJ-45 LC (SFP)

Interface Comply with IEEE 802.3


specification

Optical module - 100Bas 100Bas


type e-FX e-FX

Central - 1270–1 1261–1


wavelength 380 360
(nm)

Transmission - 2 15
distance (km)

Mean launched - –19 to –15 to


power (dBm) –14 –8

Receiver - –30 –32


sensitivity
(dBm)

Dimensions 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 262.05 x 220 x 25.4 262.05 x 110 x 22 262.05 x 110 x 22
(mm)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-74
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
EFS4 EFS0 EFT8/ETS8 EFF8
Weight (kg) 0.98 0.98 0.37 0.44

Power 33 33 EFT8: 2 6
consumption ETS8: 2.5
(W)

Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


operating Humidity: 10%–90%
condition

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating Humidity: 5%–95%
condition

Storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


environment Humidity: 10%–100%

Transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


environment Humidity: 10%–100%

4.14 EMR0
EMR0 is a 12-port FE + 1-port GE ring processing board.
EMR0 is responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals, and constructing
resilient packet ring (RPR).
Table 4-50 shows some specifications of the EMR0.
Table 4-50 Some specifications of the EMR0
Board EMR0
Comparison
Processing capability 12 x FE and 1 x GE

Number of ports on the front panel 4 FE ports and 1 GE port

Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX,


1000Base-LX/SX

Connector RJ-45 and LC (SFP)

Interface board ETF8 or EFF8

Slot Slots 1–6 and slots 13–16 (slot bandwidth


adaptation)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-75
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Caution:
For the EMR0 board: When the SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the
maximum uplink bandwidth of slot 6–8 and slot 11–13 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other
slots is 622 Mbit/s. When the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum
uplink bandwidth of slot 5–8 and slot 11–14 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25
Gbit/s.

4.14.1 Function
1. Port
„ When seated in slot 1 or 6, the EMR0 does not support the interface board.
Instead, it supports accessing four FE ports and one GE port.
„ If inserted in slots 2–5 or 13–16, the EMR0 supports the interface board ETF8 (8 x
10Base-T/100Base-TX) or EFF8 (8 x 100Base-FX). That is, it supports 12 FE
ports and a GE port.
„ The ETF8 provides 8 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX ports (RJ-45) with auto-negotiation
function (it can be set to enabled or disabled). The maximum transmission distance
is 100 m.
„ The EFF8 provides 8 x 100Base-FX FE optical interface (LC), supports
hot-swappable optical module and auto-negotiation function (set to enabled or
disabled). The maximum transmission distance is 2 km for multimode fiber and 15
km for single-mode fiber.
„ The GE port is IEEE 802.3z-compliant; the optical module adopts hot-swappable
LC optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber
and 10 km for single-mode fiber.
„ The FE port is IEEE 802.3u-compliant.
„ Support 64-byte to 9600-byte frames and theJumbo frame of 9600 bytes.
„ Support IEEE802.3X-compliant flow control.

2. Encapsulation and Mapping


„ Support LAPS and GFP-F encapsulation modes, compliant with ITU-T X.86 and
ITU-T G.7041 respectively.
„ Support service mapping into VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X≤16), and support
a maximum uplink bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s.

3. EVPL Service
„ Support EVPL service with the frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE
802.1q TAG and MPLS Martini OE.
„ Support port-based and port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and forwarding
for EVPL service. Support five types of label switch path (LSPs): ingress LSP,
egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP and RPR transit LSP.
„ Support 2 k entries of LSPs.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-76
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4. EVPLAN Service
„ Support EVPLAN service and use virtual metro area network (VMAN) format.
„ Support self-learning of source MAC address, the MAC address table has 16 k
entries. The aging time of MAC address can be set and queried.
„ Support setting and query of VLAN: the board supports 4 k VLANs and the
equipment supports 8 k VLANs.
„ Support configuration of static MAC routes, 4 k at most.
„ Support broadcast packet suppression, which can be set to enabled or disabled.
„ Support VB+VLAN-based data isolation.
„ Support RSTP, which is IEEE 802.1w-compliant.
„ Support internet group management protocol (IGMP) snooping function.
„ Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32,
and that of logical ports is 16 for each VB.

5. QoS
„ Support port-based and port+VLAN-based flow classification.
„ Support port based CAR with 64 kbit/s as the unit for rate adjustment, ranging from
64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s. The board supports 2 k CARs and one OptiX OSN 3500
equipment supports 4 k CARs.
„ Support level-3 priority dispatching.
„ Support ITU-T G.7042-compliant LCAS to achieve dynamic increase/decrease and
protection of bandwidth.

6. Resilient Packet Ring Function


„ Compliant with IEEE 802.17.
„ Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping.
„ Support weighted fair algorithm and three service levels.
„ Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in real time.
„ Support protection modes of wrap and steering. The signal fail time is less than
50ms.
„ Support self-learning function, that is, learning the correspondence between MAC
address and node number. The MAC address table supports 64 k entries.
4.14.2 Principle
Figure 4-36 takes a channel of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s signal as an example to
introduce the working principle of EMR0.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-77
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Backplane

10/100 M Encapsu
Resilient
Ethernet -lation
Interface package Cross-
service and
module ring connect unit
module mapping
10/100 M module
module

Control and SCC


communication unit
module

+3.3 V(Standby)

+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V

Figure 4-36 The principle block diagram of EMR0

1. In Receive Direction
The interface module accesses the 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signals from
external Ethernet equipment such as LAN switch and router and performs decoding
and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service
processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, CRC
termination and Ethernet performance statistics. This module also performs flow
classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame processing, internal and
external ring mapping of the resilient packet ring based on the service mode and
configuration requirement. The resilient packet ring module performs IEEE
802.17-based ring control function. At the encapsulation module, the Ethernet frame is
performed with LAPS or GFP encapsulation. After that, the services are mapped into
VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction
Demap the VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to
the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The resilient packet ring module
performs IEEE 802.17-based ring control function. The service processing module
determines the route according to the level of the equipment, performs flow
classification according to service mode and configuration requirement, and provides
frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance
statistics. Finally, the interface processing module performs parallel/serial conversion
and encoding to the signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.

3. Auxiliary Units
„ Control and communication module
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-78
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.14.3 Front Panel


Figure 4-37 shows the front panel of the EMR0.

EMR0
Figure 4-37 Front panels of the EMR0

1. Indicator
On the front panel of the EMR0, there are indicators to indicate the working status of
the board, as shown in Table 4-51.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-79
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-51 Indicator description of EMR0


Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware is faulty.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or the


service is not configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Loading or initializing board software is


green) normal.

On for 100ms and off for The board software is in loading.


100ms alternatively, green

On for 300ms and off for The board software is in initializing.


300ms alternatively, green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading


or initializing board software fails.

Off No power supply

SRV (red, yellow On, green The service is normal, and no service
and green) alarm occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

LINK (green) On The link between the GE port and the


opposite equipment is established.

Off The link between the GE port and the


opposite equipment is not established.

ACT (orange) Flashing There are data being exchanged


between the GE port and the opposite
equipment.

Off There is no data being exchanged


between the GE port and the opposite
equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-80
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Interface
There are four RJ-45 interfaces on the front panel of the EMR0: FE1, FE2, FE3 and
FE4, which input/output four 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet services.
There is also one hot-swappable LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the EMR0,
supporting 1000Base-SX and 1000Base-LX. The transmission distance of the
multimode optical interface module can reach 550 m and the transmission distance of
single-mode optical interface module can reach 10 km.
Each FE interface on EMR0 has two indicators. Table 4-52 shows the indicator
description.
Table 4-52 Indicator description of RJ-45 interface
Indicator Status Description
LINK (green) On The cable connects with the interface.

Off The cable fails to connect with the interface.

ACT (orange) Flashing Exchanging data

Off No data is being exchanged.

4.14.4 Parameter Configuration


Parameters to be configured for EMR0:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point
identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two
ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path
will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once
mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and
insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations.
„ Ethernet interface setting
Table 4-53 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on EMR0.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-81
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-53 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on EMR0


Parameter Description
Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags
are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The Tag flag is only for the
external port.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with
the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the
packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those
with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag and attach a Tag flag to the packets without
the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID Set the VLAN ID only for the external port.

Working It can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half/full-duplex, 100 Mbit/s


mode half/full-duplex or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the
interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working
mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the rate may decrease, or
the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port
of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the
service provider. Set the external port as PE and set the internal port as
P.

Encapsulation Available encapsulation: MartinioE, CCCoE, VMANoE and MartinioP.


This item works only when the port type is P. MartinioE is applicable for
point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP is for point-to-point
Ethernet connection and VMANoE is for the EVPLAN service.

LCAS enable Whether to enable LCAS.

Maximum Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
packet length

Mapping Available protocol: LAPS and GFP. It is preferable to select the default -
protocol GFP.

4.14.5 Technical Parameters


Table 4-54 lists the technical parameters of the EMR0. The parameters of GE and FE
optical interface refer to Table 4-40 and Table 4-49.
Table 4-54 Technical parameters of the EMR0
Parameter Description
Rate 10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s

Access capability 4 x 10/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s,


12 x 10/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s by using with ETF8/EFF8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-82
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Processing 12 x 10/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s
capability

Line code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 encoding signal
(100 Mbit/s)

Interface type RJ-45, LC (SFP)

Interface 100 ohm


impedance

Interface FE: IEEE 802.3u,


specification GE: IEEE 802.3z

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.2

Power 50
consumption (W)

Long-term Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


operating condition Humidity: 10% to 90%

Short-term Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


operating condition Humidity: 5% to 95%

Storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


environment Humidity: 10% to 100%

Transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


environment Humidity: 10% to 100%

4.15 ADL4/ADQ1
The ADL4 is a 1-channel STM-4 asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) service
processing board, and the ADQ1 is a 4-channel STM-1 ATM service processing
board.
The ADL4 and the ADQ1 are mainly used for accessing and processing ATM service.
Table 4-55 shows their differences.
Table 4-55 Comparison between ADL4 and ADQ1
Comparison Board ADL4 ADQ1
Access capability 1 x STM-4 ATM 4 x STM-1 ATM

Service interface: LC (SFP) LC (SFP)

Available slot (cross-connect Slots 6–8, slots 11–13 Slots 6–8, slots 11–13
capacity of 40 Gbit/s)

Slot available (cross-connect Slots 1–8, slots 11–17 Slots 1–8, slots 11–17
capacity of 80 Gbit/s)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-83
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.15.1 Functions
„ ADL4 provides one STM-4 interface and adopts SFP optical module. The following
optical module types are available: S-4.1 and L-4.1.
„ ADQ1 provides four STM-1 interfaces and adopts SFP optical module. The
following optical module types are available: I-1, S-1.1 and L-1.1.
„ ADL4 and ADQ1 can access and process E3 ATM service if working with
PL3/PD3.
„ The types of ATM service mapped to SDH include VC-3, VC-4 and VC-4-Xv
(X=1–4).
„ Up to eight VC-4s or 12 VC-3s + 4 VC-4s can be accessed at the backplane side.
„ Support 1.25 Gbit/s ATM switching capability, VP switching, VC switching, and 8 k
links. Support spatial multi-cast and logic multi-cast.
„ Support four types of services: CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR, and QoS class
based on ATM Forum RFC2514.
„ Support ITU-T I.630 based ATM protection switching (APS).
„ Support ITU-T I.610 based OAM functions: loopback (LB) and continuity check
(CC).
„ ADL4 and ADQ1 support VP-Ring and VC-Ring of one STM-4 ATM, or VP-Ring
and VC-Ring of 1–4 STM-1s.
„ Support statistical multiplexing and sharing of bandwidth.
„ Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for
maintenance and fault localization.
„ Provide abundant alarms and performance events.
4.15.2 Principle
Figure 4-38 shows the working principle of the ADL4 and ADQ1, taking one channel of
STM-1/STM-4 signal for example.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-84
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Backplane

Cross-connect
STM-1/STM-4 ATM
Physical unit
layer service Mapping
processing processing module
STM-1/STM-4 module module Cross-connect
unit

Control and
SCC
communication
module

+3.3 V(Standby)

+5 V
Power
-48 V
module
+3.3 V

Figure 4-38 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1

1. In Receive Direction:
The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical
layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, it
performs the functions of SDH, such as frame alignment, descrambling, overhead
processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs the functions of ATM cell
delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service processing module
establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends ATM service to the
mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping module implements the
mapping of ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally send the service to the
cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal sent from the cross-connect board is sent to
the mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module
for establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The
uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM
service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink
service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for matching service
rate, inserting idle cell, and descrambling cell, and then for SDH mapping, overhead,
multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after E/O conversion.

3. Auxiliary Functional Modules


„ Control and communication module
Realizes communication, control and service configuration functions.
„ Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-85
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.15.3 Front Panel


Figure 4-39 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.

ADL4 ADQ1
Figure 4-39 Front panel diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1

1. Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of ADL4 and ADQ1 to show their working
status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 4-56.
Table 4-56 Indicators of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board is working normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off No power supply or no service


configured

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is deactivated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-86
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


PROG (red On, green The board software is being loaded or
and green) initialized normally.

On for 100ms and off for The board software is in loading.


100ms alternatively, green

On for 300ms and off for The board software is in initializing


300ms alternatively, green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading


and initializing board software failed.

Off No power input

SRV (red, On, green The service is normal, and no alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to the
service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to the


service.

Off No service configured or no power


supply.

2. Interfaces
There are SFP optical interfaces on the ADL4 and ADQ1 for transmitting/receiving
STM-4/STM-1 optical signals.
4.15.4 Parameter Configuration
The major parameters to be configured are:
„ J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
„ C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations
„ ATM port
Table 4-57 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-87
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-57 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1


Parameter Description
Port type NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.

Traffic type Set according to the port.

Service type Available types: CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR.

Peak cell rate (PCR) Set the parameter for all types of services.

Sustainable cell rate Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
(SCR)

Maximum cell burst Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
size

Cell delay variation Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or
tolerance (CDVT) UBR.

4.15.5 Technical Parameters


Table 4-58 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1.
Table 4-58 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Parameter Description
ADL4 ADQ1
Rate 622080 kbit/s 155520 kbit/s

Access capability 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

ATM processing 1.25 Gbit/s


capability

Line code pattern NRZ encoding

Connector LC (SFP)

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.90 0.95

Power consumption (W) 35 35

Optical module type S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1310 1310

Transmission distance 2–15 15–40 2–15 2–15 15–40


(km)

Launched optical power –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0


(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity –28 –28 –23 –28 –34


(dBm)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-88
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
ADL4 ADQ1
Receiver overload –8 –8 –8 –8 –10
(dBm)

Long-term working Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


environment Humidity: 10% to 90%

Short-term working Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


environment Humidity: 5% to 95%

Storage environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10% to 100%

Transport environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10% to 100%

4.16 LWX
The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of
arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard
wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692. It can be seated in slots 1–8, or
11–17.
4.16.1 Functions
„ Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard
wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently.
„ Provide 3R function to client-side uplink/downlink signals (at the rate of 10
Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s), perform clock recovery and monitor its rate.
„ Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is
dual-fed signal selection.
„ The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical
channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
„ The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1
inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
„ Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication.
„ The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz.
„ Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the
corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down.
„ Support internal and external loopback function at optical interface level, facilitating
fault location.
„ Provide abundant alarms and performance events, facilitating maintenance.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-89
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Note:
Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the
service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through bandpass
filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original signal through
demodulation.

4.16.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 4-40.
Backplane
ITU-T G.692 wavelength

10 Mbit/s -
2.7 Gbit/s Optical Performance
Client side transponder WDM side and alarm SCC
10 Mbit/s - module monitoring
2.7 Gbit/s

Control and
communication SCC
module

+3.3 V (Standby)

+5 V
Power
+2.7 V -48 V
module
+3.3 V

Figure 4-40 Functional block diagram of LWX

1. In Receiving Direction
The optical transponder module processes STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16 optical signal
received from the client side. At the DWDM side, LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant
standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one
channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors and
monitoring J1 byte. The optical transponder module has jitter suppression function
which guarantees good jitter suppression performance.

2. In Transmitting Direction
LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the DWDM
side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs the
signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16.

3. Auxiliary Functional Modules


„ Control and communication module
Realize communication, control and service configuration functions of the board.
„ Power module

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-90
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Provide various voltages required by the boards.


4.16.3 Front Panel
Figure 4-41 shows the front panel of the LWX board.

Figure 4-41 Front panel of the LWX

1. Indicators
Refer to Table 4-59.
Table 4-59 Indicators of the LWX
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board is working normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails

On for 100ms and off The board hardware is mismatched.


for 100ms alternately,
red

Off No power supply or no service configured

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is inactivated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-91
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


PROG (red On, green The board software is being loaded or
and green) initialized normally.

On for 100ms and off The board software is being loaded.


for 100ms
alternatively, green

On for 300ms and off The board software is being initialized


for 300ms alternately,
green

On, red The board software is lost, or loading and


initializing board software failed.

Off No power supply

SRV (red, On, green The service is normal, and no alarm occurs.
yellow and
green) On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to the service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to the service.

Off No service configured or no power supply.

2. Interfaces
Table 4-60 describes LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX.
Table 4-60 Interface of the LWX
Interface Type Description
IN/IN1/IN2 LC Receives the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing
board MR2A

OUT/OUT LC Sends signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2A


1/OUT2

TX LC Sends service signal to client-side equipment

RX LC Receives the service signal from client-side equipment


Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-92
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.16.4 Technical Parameters


Table 4-61and Table 4-62 show the optical interface parameters on client side and
DWDM side of the LWX. Table 4-63 shows the technical parameters of the LWX.
Table 4-61 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item Unit Descripton
Rate 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s

Light source type MLM SLM SLM

Transmission distance km 2 15 80

Characteristics of transmitter at point S

Working wavelength nm 850 1260–1360 1500–1580


range

Maximum mean dBm –3 0 +3


launched power

Minimum mean launched dBm –10 –5 –2


power

Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2

Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30


suppression ratio

Eye pattern G.957 G.957 compliant G.957 compliant


compliant

Characteristics of receiver at point R

Receiver type PIN PIN APD

Working wavelength nm 1200–1600 1200–1600 1200–1600


range

Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28

Minimum receiver dBm –3 0 –9


overload

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27

Table 4-62 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX


Item Unit Description
Channel spacing GHz 100

Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn

Transmission distance km 640 170 80

Maximum mean launched dBm –2 –2 –2


power

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-93
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Item Unit Description


Minimum mean launched dBm +3 +3 +3
power

Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +10 +10

Nominal central frequency THz 192.10–196. 192.10–196.00 192.10–196.00


00

Central frequency offset GHz ±12.5 ±12.5 ±12.5

Maximum –20 dB nm 0.2 0.4 0.4


spectrum width

Minimum side mode dB 35 35 35


suppression ratio

Dispersion tolerance value ps/nm 12800 2400 1600

Eye pattern G.957 G.957 G.957


compliant compliant compliant

Characteristics of receiver at point Rn

Receiver type APD PIN

Working wavelength range nm 1200–1600 1200–1600

Receiver sensitivity dBm –31 –21

Minimum receiver dBm –9 0


overload

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27

Table 4-63 Technical parameters of the LWX


Parameter Description
Line code type NRZ encoding

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.10

Power consumption (W) 30

Long-term working environment Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term working environment Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Storage environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-94
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
Transport environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–100%

4.17 MR2A/MR2C
The MR2A and MR2C are both 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards,
adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals. The MR2A
board can be seated in slots 1–8, or 11–17 and the MR2C board can be seated in
slots 19–26, or 29–36. The MR2A and the MR2C boards have same functions and
principle.
4.17.1 Functions
„ Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692
(DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging
from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
„ Serve as an OTM of OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals, as
shown in Figure 4-42.
„ Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station
adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 4-43.
„ Work with LWX to form an OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals.
„ The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz.

Drop1 Drop2 Drop1 Drop2 Drop1 Drop2


Out MI Out MI Out MI
MR2A/ MR2A/ MR2A/
MR2C MR2C MR2C
In MO In MO In MO
Add1 Add2 Add1 Add2 Add1 Add2

(1) (2)

(1) MR2A/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels of signals.
(2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four
channels.
Figure 4-42 MR2A/MR2C serves as OTM station

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-95
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

In Out
Drop1 Add2
MR2A/
LWX LWX
MR2C
Add1 Drop2
MI MO

Figure 4-43 MR2A/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals

4.17.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2C board is shown in Figure 4-44.
Front panel Backplane

MO
MI
Drop2
Drop1
OADM
Add2
Add1
Out
In

Figure 4-44 Functional block diagram of the MR2A

The MR2A/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two channels
of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. It also
provides intermediate ports to access other add/drop multiplexing boards for more
powerful add/drop capability. MR2A/MR2C has no interface with the backplane.
4.17.3 Front Panel
Figure 4-45 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2C is
same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-96
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-45 Front panel of the MR2A

1. Indicators
None.

2. Interfaces
The front panel of the MR2A/MR2C has four pairs of LC optical interfaces. Table 4-64
shows their description.
Table 4-64 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2C
Interface Type Description
A01–A02 LC Access two channels of service signal added locally.

D01–D02 LC Drop two channels of service signal locally.

IN LC Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.

OUT LC Send two channels of multiplexed signal.

MO/MI LC Concatenation interface, through which multiple


MR2A/MR2C boards can be concatenated.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-97
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.17.4 Technical Parameters


Table 4-65 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2C.
Table 4-65 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2C
Parameter Description
Operating wavelength Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM)
compliant standard wavelength, with operating
wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm

Line code pattern NRZ encoding

Connector LC

Channel spacing (GHz) 100

Insertion loss (dB) <2

Adjacent channel isolation >25


(dB)

Non-adjacent channel >35


isolation (dB)

–0.5 dB channel <±0.11


wavelength (nm)

Dimensions (mm) MR2A: 262.05 x 220 x 25.4


MR2C: 262.05 x 110 x 22

Weight (kg) 1.01

Power consumption (W) 0

Long-term working Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


environment Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term working Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


environment Humidity: 5%–95%

Storage environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Transport environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-98
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.18 BA2/BPA
The BA2 is the 2-port optical booster amplifier. The BPA is the optical booster &
pre-amplifier.
Table 4-66 shows the difference between the BA2 and BPA.
Table 4-66 Comparison between BA2 and BPA
Comparison BA2 BPA
Processing 2-channel power 1-channel power amplification
capability amplification 1-channel pre-amplification

Slot available Slots 1–8 and 11–17 Slots 1–8 and 11–17

4.18.1 Functions
„ Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to
achieving a transmission distance of up to above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of
G.652 optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber).
„ BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical signal
and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB–25 dB, thus improving the
receiver sensitivity to –38 dBm.
„ Support automatic laser temperature and optical power control of the EDFA
module.
„ Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the
optical power of the EDFA module.
„ Support report of the laser performance parameter.
„ Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the
software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the
software will automatically start the laser.
„ Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment
management and maintenance.
„ Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
4.18.2 Application
In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make
the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed.
The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 4-46.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-99
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Transmit BA Receive

Transmit PA Receive

Figure 4-46 Positions of BA and PA in network

4.18.3 Principle
Figure 4-47 shows the principle block diagram of the BA2/BPA.
Optical input Optical output Optical input Optical output

Fixed filter

EDFA optical module 1 EDFA optical module 2


Optics part

Pump Module Input/output Pump Drive Module Input/output


Drive
current temperature pow er current module temperature pow er Drive and
module
check control check check control check check part

A/D and D/A conversion

Data processing and


Communication Control communication part
SCC module module

Figure 4-47 Principle block diagram of the BA2/BPA

1. Optics Part
This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification effect.

2. Drive and Check Part


This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status
of respective parts of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the
possible faults.
This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module,
controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power.

3. Data Processing and Communication Part


This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of
the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-100
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that
the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated
above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be
arranged and reported to NM.
4.18.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48 The front panel of the BA2 and BPA

1. Indicator
The indicator description of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Table 4-67.
Table 4-67 Indicator description of the BA2 and BPA
Indicator Color and status Description
STAT (red On, green The board works normally.
and green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on.

ACT (green) On The service is activated,

Off The service is not activated

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-101
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Color and status Description


PROG (red On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or
and green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, FLASH or FGPA.
green

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is in
300ms alternatively, BIOS boot stage.
green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No power supply or no service


configured.

2. Interface
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for
receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using pluggable optical module is easy for
maintenance.
4.18.5 Technical Parameters
The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 4-68.
Table 4-68 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
Parameter Description
BA2 BPA
Rate 2488320 kbit/s and 9953280 kbit/s

Processing capability 2-channel power 1-channel power


amplification amplification and
1-channel
pre-amplification

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-102
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Parameter Description
BA2 BPA
Power consumption (W) 20 20

Working wavelength range BA: 1530–1565 BA: 1530–1565


(nm) PA: 1550.12

Single channel input power BA: –6 to +3 BA: –6 to +3


range (dBm) PA: –10 to –38

Total output power (dBm) BA: +14 or +17 BA: +14 or +17

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) – PA: –38

Noise figure (dB) BA: <6.5 BA: <6.5, PA: <6

Type of optical interface V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2,


V-64.2, U-64.2 V-64.2, U-64.2

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

4.19 COA
The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit
and communication circuit in an aluminium case. Two types of COA are available:
61COA and 62COA.

Note:
The COA mentioned below includes 61COA and 62COA. The feature of the COA
means it can be provided by both 61COA and 62COA.

The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. Its appearance is shown in Figure 4-49. The
61COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical
amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA are
the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The COA is externally installed and does
not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs
separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs as
required.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-103
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-49 Appearance of the 61COA

The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used in the receiving end of the SDH
equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman
amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize
better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission
distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a
single span. Figure 4-50 shows the appearance of the 62COA.
4

1
2
3

1. Captive screw 2. Ejector lever 3. COA board.


4. ESD jack 5. Power access board
Figure 4-50 Appearance of the 62COA

4.19.1 Functions
„ The 61COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster
amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the optical interface board up to
+14 dBm or +17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance.
„ The 61COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of –38
dBm.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-104
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

„ The 62COA is configured at the receiveing end of the SDH system as a Raman
amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the
transmission of more than 170 km.
„ The 62COA provides the preamplifier function with the receiver sensitivity of –39
dBm.
„ The 61COA and 62COA support automatic laser shutdown.
„ Communicate with the SCC board via RS-232 serial port, report the alarms and
performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration
commands from the NM.
„ The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can
work separately.
4.19.2 Application
The 61COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2
and BPA.
The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical
transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of Stimulated Raman
Scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the
transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 4-51.
Raman Amplifier
Signal light
Optical
EDFA Pump light receiver
Pump light
Fiber Laser

Transmitting end Coupler Receiving end

Figure 4-51 Application of Raman amplifer (62COA)

The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed
Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber
end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a
big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman
pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus
effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.
4.19.3 Principle
The principle block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 4-52.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-105
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Optical input Optical output

Fixed filter

EDFA optical module


Optics part

Pump Drive Module Input/output


current module temperature power Drive and
check control check check part

A/D and D/A conversion

Data processing and


Communicatio Control communication part
SCC n module module

Figure 4-52 Principle block diagram of 61COA

1. Optics Part
It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal.

2. Drive and Check Part


It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the
components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the potential faults.
It implements the functions such as pump current detection, optical module drive
control or optical module temperature control, input/output optical power detection.

3. Data Processing and Communication Part


It consists of the CPU and its peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of
the detected circuit. On the basis of the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the
nominal range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It
sorts out the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM.
The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA, except that the 62COA adopts
Raman amplifier while the 61COA adopts EDFA amplifier.
4.19.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the 61COA is shown in Figure 4-53.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-106
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11

2. Running 3. Alarm
1. ID DIP switch 4. RS232-1
indicator indicator
5. RS232-2 6. MONITOR-1 7. MONITOR-2 8. IN input optical port
9. OUT output optical port 10. Power switch 11. –48 V power interface
Figure 4-53 Front panel of the 61COA

The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 4-54.

1. SC/PC optical interface 2. E2000 optical interface 3. Air filter


4. Fan board 5. RJ-45 6 RS232-1
7 RS232-2 8. DIP switch(5-8 bits) 9. DIP switch(1-4 bits)
10. Power input interface 11. Power switch
Figure 4-54 Front panel of the 62COA

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-107
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Indicator
Description of the the indicators on the 61COA/62 COA front panel is shown in Table
4-69.
Table 4-69 Indicator description of the 61COA/62COA
Indicator Color and status Description
ALM (Red The constant ON status of the alarm Memory self-check error.
alarm indicator and the constant OFF
indicator) status of the running indicator

Flashing 3 times every other second A critical alarm occurs.

Flashing twice every other second A major alarm occurs.

Flashing once every other second A minor alarm occurs.

RUN (Green Flashing 1 times every 2 seconds Normal (in service)


running
indicator) Flashing 1 times every 4 seconds Database protected mode;
communication with the SCC
interrupted

Flashing 5 times every second Program startup/load

3. Interface
„ Optical interface
There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA for
inputting/outputting optical signals.
The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical
interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber
connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.

Figure 4-55 E2000 flange and fiber connector

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-108
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Caution:
The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a special designed optical cap. Do not remove this
optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical cap)
into the E2000 flange.

„ RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port


Control & communication interface. It communicates with the SCC, reports alarms
and performance events.

Note:
The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack via the
serial control cable to realize communication with the SCC.

When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed.
The RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA is connected with the RS-232-1 of No. 2 COA via the
serial port, and the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA is connected with the RS-232-1 of No. 3
COA. The ports are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the
SCC unit on the subrack via the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA, as shown in Figure 4-56.
F&f RS232-1 RS232-2 RS232-1 RS232-2

Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
SCC GND GND

Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx

TDA TDA/COA

Figure 4-56 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC

Note:
To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be
switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated
subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.

„ MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface
MONITOR-1and MONITOR-2 are the alarm output port when the 61COA is used
alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in
Table 4-70.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-109
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-70 Relation between output alarm and interface pin


MONITOR-1 Pin MONITOR-2 Pin Definition
Number Number
1, 6 1, 6 EDFA output optical power too low

2, 7 2, 7 Working temperature of the pump laser


over threshold

3, 8 3, 8 Cool current of pump laser over threshold

4, 9 4, 9 Environment temperature over threshold

5 5 Digital ground

„ RJ-45 Ethernet interface


Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load
the board software.
„ –48 V power interface
It inputs the –48V power from the power output interface on PIU board or power box
on the cabinet. The voltage range under normal working condition: –48 V ± 20%
(–38.4 V to –57.6 V).
„ DIP switch
The DIP switch of the 61COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It sets the
ID of the 61COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the lower state, it
is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs with different IDs.
The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber.
For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0
and down position means 1. The bits 1-4 show the board ID, and indicate the ID
number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth
bit indicates the type of fiber. “0" indicates G.652 fiber, and “1” indicates G.655 fiber.
4.19.5 Installation
The COA adopts case-shape design, no slot in the subrack needed and hence higher
slot efficiency. In the ETSI cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA.
The 62COA is installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears.

1. Installation of the 61COA


The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides the cabinet. The 61COA is pushed
into the brackets along the guide rails in the brackets and fixed. One bracket can
house two 61COAs horizontally with the front panels of the 61COA at the front side of
the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-57.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-110
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-57 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet

2. Installation of the 62COA


The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and
screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI
cabinet (1th and 3rd floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is
installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully
configured.
4.19.6 Technical Parameters
Table 4-71 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA
Parameter Description
61COA 62COA
Dimensions (mm) 240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H) 436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H)

Weight (kg) 3.5 8

Power consumption (W) 10 75

Processing capability One optical signal One optical signal

Connector SC/PC SC/PC and E2000

Operating wavelength 1550.12 1550.12


(nm)

Input optical power range NA –39 to –20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal


(dBm) without FEC)

Output optical +14/+17 NA


power(dBm)

Pump wavelength (nm) NA 1451.2

Maximum on/off gain NA >15 (applied to G.652 fiber)


(dB)

Noise figure (dB) NA <–1.5

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-111
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.20 DCU
The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate the optical signal
dispersion accumulated during fiber transmission in the 10 Gbit/s system. In addition,
it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long
distance optical transmission.
The DCU can be seated in slots 1–8 and slots 11–17.
4.20.1 Functions
„ Use chirp grating to compensate the optical dispersion and compress the pulse
signal for signal recovery.
„ When the transmission distance exceeds 80 km, the DCU can make dispersion
compensation to two channels of optical signals at most simultaneously, with the
compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km G.652 fiber)
or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the free
combination of the two.
„ Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission.
4.20.2 Application
After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal
becomes broadened as affected by the dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously
and cannot be received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for
dispersion compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in
Figure 4-58.
Pulse broading Pulse compressing
Long fiber
Optical Optical
transmitter BA PA DCU
receiver
1550.12 nm

1550.12 nm

Figure 4-58 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system

Note:
The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is
required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical
interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion
compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical
signal is output.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-112
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.20.3 Principle
Figure 4-59 shows the principle block diagram of the DCU.

Input
Chirp grating
IN
Coupler
OUT

Output Long Short


w avelength w avelength

Figure 4-59 The principle block diagram of the DCU

1. In Receiving Direction
The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp
grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB.
For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different
reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the
inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance to the short
wavelengths. While that for long wavelength components is at the external part of the
grating, which means a shorter transport distance to the long wavelengths.
Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is not the same. As a result,
the signals reflected back by the grating is “compressed”, thus achieving the
compensation effect.

2. In Transmitting Direction
The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from
the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical
signals can be received by receiver again and can be transmitted for a long distance
over optical fiber.
4.20.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 4-60.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-113
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-60 The front panel of the DCU

1. Indicator
None.

2. Interface
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving
and transmitting two channels of 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical
module is easy for maintenance.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-114
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.20.5 Technical Parameters


The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 4-72.
Table 4-72 Technical parameters of the DCU
Parameter Description
Rate 9953280 kbit/s

Processing capability Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical


signals

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.42

Power consumption (W) 0

Central wavelength (nm) 1550.12 ±0.05

–0.5 dB bandwidth (nm) >0.4

Dispersion compensation (ps/nm) 1020 (60 km)


1360 (80 km)

Insertion loss (dB) <8.3

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-115
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.21 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE
The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board. EXCS is an
enhanced one. The UXCS is a super one, classified into UXCSA and UXCSB
(UXCSA and UXCSB is two types of the UXCS board). The XCE is a lower-order
cross-connect and synchronous timing board used for extended subrack. Table 4-73
shows their differences.
GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot 9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the
functions of cross-connection and system timing.
Table 4-73 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Cross-connect Higher order Lower order Usage
and timing cross-connect cross-conne
board capability ct capacity
GXCSA 40 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not
supporting the extended subrack.

EXCSA 80 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not


supporting the extended subrack.

UXCSA 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not


supporting the extended subrack.

UXCSB 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not


supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended
subrack

XCE 0 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s Used for the extended subrack (Note)


Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.

4.21.1 Functions
„ Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12
unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of
different boards, see Table 4-73.
„ Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect,
multicast and broadcast services.
„ Support SNCP protection at VC-3, and VC-12.
„ The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and capable of
adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s.
„ Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and
AU4-64C.
„ Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and
non-revertive switching.
„ Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time
less than 50ms.
„ Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than
50ms.
„ Support the processing of S1 byte to realize clock protection switching.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-116
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

„ Input and output two channels of synchronous clock, with clock signal set to 2 MHz
or 2 Mbit/s.
„ Communicate with other boards, providing channels for MSP, SNCP, TPS and
clock protocol.
4.21.2 Principle
Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working
principle, as shown in Figure 4-61. The working principle of XCE board is little different
from the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting the lower order cross-connect.
5 Gbit/s or
20 Gbit/s
lower order
cross-connect
matrix

Timing
40 Gbit/s or 80 Gbit/s unit
higher order cross-
connect matrix

Control and
communication unit

Figure 4-61 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS

1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix


GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and EXCS
performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect.

2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix


Implement 5 Gbit/s or 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full
cross-connect, providing the system with powerful service grooming capability.

3. Timing Unit
Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the
system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various
nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency
and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup
time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the
position of the frame head in the data.

4. Control and Communication Unit


Communicates with SCC and other boards, and ensures communication with other
boards when SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals for
the board and system.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-117
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

5. Power Module
Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.
4.21.3 Front Panel
Figure 4-62 shows the front panels of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.

GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA UXCSB XCE


Figure 4-62 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

1. Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE for
indicating their working status. The description of the indicators are shown in Table
4-74

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-118
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-74 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE


Indicator Color and status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternatively, red

Off The board is not powered on, or no


service is configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or


green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off for Board software is being uploaded to


100ms alternatively, FLASH or FGPA.
green

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is in
300ms alternatively, BIOS boot stage.
green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, yellow On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm
and green) occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

SYNC (red and On, green The clock works in synchronous status.
green)
On, red The clock works in hold-over or free-run
mode.

2. Interfaces
There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended
subrack cables. “EXA” and “EXB” backup for each other. Through these two
interfaces, the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown
in Figure 4-63.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-119
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S

D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S

D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S

D75S/D12S

D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S

AUX
PIU

PIU
FAN FAN FAN
S S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)

PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
XCE
XCE
PQ1/PQM (P)

EXB EXA

EXB EXA

(1)(2)(3) (4)

Figure 4-63 Configuratin of extended subracks


(1) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main
subrack.
(2)The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main
subrack.
(3)The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the
main subrack.
(4)The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the
main subrack.
The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous
timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown
in Table 4-75. For detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface
description of the AUX board.
Table 4-75 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
Interface name Description Interface type
CLKO1 75 ohm clock output interface 1 SMB

CLKO2 75 ohm clock output interface 2 SMB

CLKI1 75 ohm clock input interface 1 SMB

CLKI2 75 ohm clock input interface 2 SMB

CLK1 120 ohm clock interface 1 RJ-45

CLK2 120 ohm clock interface 2 RJ-45

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-120
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.21.4 Parameter Configuration


The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as
follows:

1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM)


is not Started
„ Primary reference clock
„ Trace level of clock source

2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started


„ Primary reference clock
„ Trace level of clock source
„ Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
„ S1 byte
„ Threshold for selecting clock switching protection action
4.21.5 Technical Parameters
Table 4-76 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Table 4-76 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Parameter Description
GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE
Higher order 40 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s
cross-connect capability

Lower order 5 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s


cross-connect capacity

External clock 2 channels of 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 40

Weight (kg) 1.81 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.50

Power consumption (W) 27 62 65 65 25

Long-term working Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


environment Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term working Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


environment Humidity: 5%–95%

Storage environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Transport environment Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-121
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.22 SCC
The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18.
It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features. For
the functions and features of the GSCC, refer to Intelligent Features User Manual.
4.22.1 Functions
„ Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will be
switched to the standby board automatically.
„ Monitor service performance, and collect performance event and alarm
information.
„ Provide F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape
optical amplifier (COA).
„ Provide network protection schemes such as MSP and SNCP.
„ Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX
board) for communication with the NM.
„ Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active
and standby SCCs.
„ Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for
network management.
„ Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serial 1–4.
„ Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX.
„ Provide the operation administration and maintenance (OAM) interface through
AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 data connected
equipment (DCE).
„ Monitor the two –48 V power supplies of the system.
„ Support control of four cabinet indicators.
„ Process 16 Boolean inputs and four Boolean outputs.
„ Monitor the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX.
„ Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
„ Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-122
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.22.2 Principle

Caution:
There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1.
The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current
databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the
databases will be recovered in the order of drdb→fdb0→fdb1. The drdb will be
checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will
be recovered to Mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0
or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged,
fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up fdb0 and fdb1 and
compare the data in them.

Figure 4-64 shows the principle block diagram of the SCC.


16 Boolean input interfaces and
F1 4 Boolean output interfaces
1 orderw ire phone
Overhead Pow er 4 cabinet alarm indicator interfaces
2 SDH NNI phones processing monitoring AUX backup pow er alarm detection
Serial 1~4 module module FAN alarm detection and management
50 DCCs (D1 ~ D3) PIU alarm detection and management

485 communication bus

NM interface
Communication
Control module F&f
module
OAM

Figure 4-64 The principle block diagram of the SCC

1. Control Module
The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and
performance events, and backs up important data.

2. Communication Module
The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 M compatible Ethernet
interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as TDA,
COA and DCU, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40
DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.

3. Overhead Processing Module


The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and
processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serial 1–4. The overhead processing module
also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one orderwire
interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast data
interfaces serial 1–4.
The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Table 4-77.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-123
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Table 4-77 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2

AU_PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 Serial4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12 Serial3

S1 M1 E2

4. Power Monitoring Module


The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.
„ The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and
switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through
AUX).
„ The –48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors
and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen Boolean inputs and four Boolean
outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.

4.22.3 Front Panel


The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 4-65.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-124
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Figure 4-65 The front panel of the SCC

1. Switch
The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 4-78
Table 4-78 Switch description of the SCC
Name Function
RESET Reset button

ALMCUT Alarm cut switch

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-125
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Indicator
The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 4-79
Table 4-79 Indicator description of the SCC
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The board works normally.
green)
On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off The board hardware is mismatched.


for 100ms alternatively,
red

Off The board is not powered on, or no


service is configured.

ACT (green) On The service is activated.

Off The service is not activated.

PROG (red and On, green Upload of board software to FLASH or


green) the FPGA upload is normal, or the board
software initialization is normal.

On for 100ms and off Board software is being uploaded to


for 100ms alternatively, FLASH or FGPA.
green

On for 300ms and off The board software is initializing, and is


for 300ms alternatively, in BIOS boot stage.
green

On, red The board software in FLASH or the


FPGA configuration is lost, resulting in
upload and initialization failure.

Off No power supply.

SRV (red, On, green Service is normal, no service alarm


yellow and occurs.
green)
On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

PWRA (red and On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal.
green)
On (red/off) The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost
or failed).

PWRB (red and On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal.
green)
On (red/off) The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost
or failed).

PWRC (red and On, green The 3.3 V protection power is normal.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-126
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

Indicator Status Description


green) On, red The 3.3 V protection power is lost.

ALMC (yellow) On, green Currently in permanent alarm cut-off


status.

Off Give audible warning upon alarm.


Note: A indicates the first power input.
B indicates the second power input.

3. Interface
The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to
interface description of the AUX.
4.22.4 Technical Parameters
Table 4-80 Technical parameters of the SCC
Parameter Description
Processing capability System control, inter-board communication,
orderwire, and power detection

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.88

Power consumption (W) 10

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-127
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.23 AUX
The AUX is the system auxiliary interface board, seated in slot 37 of the subrack.
The AUX provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management
interface, and the central backup function of the +3.3 V board power supply.
4.23.1 Functions
„ Provide X.25-supporting interface OAM.
„ Provide sixteen Boolean input interfaces and four Boolean output interfaces.
„ Provide four output alarm concatenation interfaces
„ Provide four auxiliary serial data interfaces (serial 1–4) for transparent data
transmission.
„ Provide one 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1).
„ Provide one orderwire interface.1.
„ Provide two subnet outgoing connection signaling interfaces
„ Provide two subnet outgoing audio interfaces.
„ Provide three Ethernet NM interfaces, two connecting with the active and standby
SCCs and the other one with NM.
„ Provide one 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet commissioning interface
for subrack commissioning.
„ Provide one 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface; Support one
extended subrack and implement service configuration and grooming of the
subrack.
„ Provide nineteen 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for
inter-board communication.
„ Provide two analog BITS clock input interfaces and two analog BITS clock output
interfaces.
„ Provide two data BITS clock input interfaces and two data BITS clock output
interfaces.
„ Provide administration serial interface F&f to manage external devices such as
COA.
„ Support the central backup function of the board +3.3 V power supply, that is, 1:N
protection for the secondary power supply of the boards.
„ Provide the orderwire ring current function.
„ Provide four cabinet indicators and support alarm concatenation.
4.23.2 Principle
The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module.
Figure 4-66 shows its principle block diagram.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-128
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

NM interface

Communica-
Auxiliary Interface tion Inter-board
interface module module communication interface

+3.3 V
Power (standby power
+3.3 V
-48 V supply for each
module +2.7 V
board)
+5 V

Figure 4-66 The principle block diagram of the AUX

1. Communication Module
Provide NM interface for active/standby SCC, OAM interface, and interfaces for
inter-board communication.

2. Interface Module
Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output.

3. Power Module
The power module not only provides the AUX with working power supply, but also
provides various boards on the subrack with +3.3 V central power backup function.
4.23.3 Front Panel
The AUX front panel is shown in Figure 4-67.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-129
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

STAT
CLKO1
CLKI1
CLKO2
CLKI2

CLK1 CLK2

REV ETH

F&f COM

F1 EXT

PHONE LAMP1

V1 LAMP2

V2 ALMO1

OAM ALMO2

S1 ALMI1

S2 ALMI2

S3 ALMI3

S4 ALMI4

Figure 4-67 The front panel of the AUX

1. Indicator
The indicator indicates the status of the AUX board. Its description is shown in Table
4-81.
Table 4-81 Indicator description of the AUX
Indicator Status Description
STAT (red and On, green The +3.3 V power supply is normal.
green)
On, red The +3.3 V power supply is abnormal, and the
AUX board is fed with the backup power.

Off Both the +3.3 V working power and the backup


power fail, and the board is fed with no power.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-130
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

2. Interface
The interface description of the AUX is shown in Table 4-82.
Table 4-82 Interface description of the AUX
Interface Description Interface Description
CLKO1 75 ohm clock output CLKI1 75 ohm clock input interface 1
interface 1

CLKO2 75 ohm clock output CLKI2 75 ohm clock input interface 2


interface 2

CLK1 120 ohm clock interface 1 CLK2 120 ohm clock interface 2

REV Reserved ETH NM interface

F&f F&f interface COM COM commissioning interface

F1 F1 interface EXT Extended subrack interface

PHONE Orderwire interface LAMP1 Cabinet alarm indicator output


interface

V1 Subnet outgoing audio LAMP2 Cabinet alarm indicator input


interface 2 concatenation interface

V2 Subnet outgoing audio ALMO1 Boolean alarm concatenation


interface 2 interface

OAM OAM interface ALMO2 1–4 Boolean alarm output


interface

S1 Serial 1 ALMI1 Input interface for Boolean


alarm signals of channels 1–4

S2 Serial 2 ALMI2 Input interface for Boolean


alarm signals of channels 5–8

S3 Serial 3 ALMI3 Input interface for Boolean


alarm signals of channels
9–12

S4 Serial 4 ALMI4 Input interface for Boolean


alarm signals of channels
13–16

Of the interfaces listed in Table 4-82, except that the clock interface uses SMB
connector, others adopt RJ-45 connector. The pin assignment of RJ-45 connector is
shown in Figure 4-68.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-131
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

N o. S ig n a l
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 R X-

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 4-68 Pin assignment of RJ-45

3. Connection of Alarm Concatenation


„ Connection of Boolean alarm concatenation, and alarm output
Figure 4-69 shows the alarm input and output connection of a single or multiple
cabinets. Connect the alarm output interface to the alarm concatenation interface of
lower level. Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to
the centralized alarm system.

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2

Subrack 1 Subrack 3
Alarm Alarm
concatenation concatenation

Alarm Alarm
output output
Centralized
alarm system Alarm input Al arm input

Subrack 2 Subrack 4
Alarm
Alarm concatenation
concatenation

Alarm Alarm
output output

Alarm input Al arm input

Figure 4-69 Connection of alarm input, alarm concatenation, and alarm output

„ Cabinet alarm indicator connection


The connection of the four cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 4-70. The
cabinet alarm indicator signal output of Subrack 2 is connected to the concatenated
cabinet alarm indicator input of Subrack 1, and then connected to the cabinet alarm
indicator output of Subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top of the cabinet.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-132
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4 cabinet
alarm indicators
Cabinet indicator
subrack 1
LAMP1

LAMP2

subrack 2
LAMP1

LAMP2

Figure 4-70 Cabinet alarm indicator connection

4.23.4 DIP Switch and Jumper


The jumper J9 at the right lower part of the AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN
3500 as main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 4-83.
Table 4-83 Jumper J9 setting
Jumper Setting Description
J9 shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as main subrack.

Not shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as extended subrack.

4.23.5 Technical Parameters


Table 4-84 Technical parameters of the AUX
Parameter Description
Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 110 x 44

Weight (kg) 0.96

Power consumption (W) 11

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-133
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.24 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board.
It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering, and can be seated in
slots 27 and 28.
4.24.1 Functions
„ Provide lightning protection function and report the alarm of lightning protection
failure.
„ Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and
shielding the power supply.
„ Protect the power interface from damage caused by misconnection.
„ Provide two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA and HUB.
„ Report the board in position alarm.
„ Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole
subrack independently.
4.24.2 Principle
Figure 4-71 shows the principle block diagram of the PIU.

BGND Lightning
Pow er protection
access unit and Filter unit Backplane
-48V unit failure
detection

Lightning protection unit failure alarm


SCC

Figure 4-71 The principle block diagram of the PIU

1. Power Access Unit


The power access unit accesses the –48 V power for the system.

2. Lightning Protection Unit


The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will
report the failure of lightning protection unit to SCC.

3. Filter Unit
The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal
to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-134
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.24.3 Front Panel


The PIU front panel is shown in Figure 4-72.

-48V power supply interface

Two 50W power interfaces


for devices such as COA
and HUB

Figure 4-72 The front panel of the PIU

There are power interfaces on the PIU front panel. Its description is shown in Table
4-85.
Table 4-85 Interfaces on PIU front panel
Interface Description
PWR –48 V power access interface

PS1/PS2 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-135
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.24.4 Technical Parameters


Table 4-86 Technical parameters of the PIU
Parameter Description
Input voltage –38.4 V to –72 V

Protecion tube F7 250V-20A-0.00355ohm

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 110 x 44

Weight (kg) 1.15

Power consumption (W) 8

Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C


Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C


Humidity: 5%–95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C


Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-136
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.25 FAN
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 4-73. A single
subrack needs three fan boxes. FAN is the fan control board, responsible for fan
speed adjustment, fan failure detection, and reporting failure of itself and the fan
not-in-position alarm.

Figure 4-73 The appearance of the FAN

4.25.1 Functions
„ The fan boxes support hot swapping.
„ Power supply for the three fan boxes are for mutual backup.
„ Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following
aspects:
− Automatically adjust the fan speed
− When one of the fan module goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds
− When the speed adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to rotate at their
full speeds.
„ Detect fan failure.
„ Turns off the fans at low temperature.
„ Reports alarm and in position information.
„ Provide indicator on front panel indicating the running status of the fans.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-137
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.25.2 Principle
Figure 4-74 shows the principle block diagram of FAN.

Status signal
Speed adjusting signal Pow er
Status ouput supply
FAN Fan
Alarm output

External pow er ground 1

Pow er supply Pow er ground

External pow er supply 1


External pow er ground 1
Fan pow er board
External pow er supply 2
External pow er ground 2

Figure 4-74 The principle block diagram of the FAN

1. Fan Power Board


The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage.

2. Fan Control Board


The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed adjusting signal for
different rotating speeds. The FAN also detects the failure of the fans, fan power board
and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending command to
make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also receives the
turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The following items
involves in the detection by FAN: failure of the fan power board, fault of the speed
adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan on-position.
4.25.3 Front Panel
The front panel of fan boxes provides an indicator that indicates the operation status of
the fans and the FAN board. Its description is shown in Table 4-87.
Table 4-87 Indicator description of the fan box
Indicator Color Description
STAT (red, yellow On, green The fan operates normally.
and green)
On, red The fan, fan power board or FAN is abnormal.

On, yellow The fan is turned off due to low temperature.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-138
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 4 Boards

4.25.4 Technical Parameters


Table 4-88 Technical parameters of the FAN
Dimensions (mm) 50.8 (H) x 120 (W) x 120 (D)
Weight (kg) 1.5
Power consumption (W) 15 x 3 (the input voltage is 48 V)
Working voltage –38.4 V to –57.6 V DC (–48 V nominal)
Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Humidity: 5%–95%
Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–100%
Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–100%

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-139
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

5 Cables

This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable
structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500
include:
„ Fiber jumper
„ Power cable and grounding cable
„ Alarm cable
„ Management cable
„ Clock cable
„ Signal cable

5.1 Fiber Jumper


5.1.1 Classification

The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Classification of fiber jumper
Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Length
Optical fiber LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm SLM 6 m, 10 m, 20 m,
connecting OSN optical fiber 30 m, 50 m
equipment to the
ODF or 2 mm MLM 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
connecting OSN optical fiber m, 30 m, 50 m
equipment to
other equipment LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
optical fiber 30 m, 50 m

5-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Length


2 mm MLM 10 m, 20 m, 30 m,
optical fiber 50 m

SC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20


optical fiber m, 30 m, 50 m, 80
m

Optical fiber LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm SLM 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m,


connecting OSN optical fiber 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
equipments
2 mm MLM 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
optical fiber m, 30 m

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm SLM 6 m, 10 m, 20 m,


optical fiber 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM 5 m, 10 m, 20 m,


optical fiber 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC E2000/APC 2 mm SLM NA


optical fiber

Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX
OSN 3500 adopts LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08). The “IN”
interface on the externally-installed 62COA adopts E2000/APC connector. Be careful
when selecting jumper fiber.

Note:
Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to
multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical
transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.

5.1.2 Connector

Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500 board front panel are of LC/PC type,
as shown in Figure 5-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical connector. The
“IN” interface of the externally-installed 62COA adopts E2000/APC connector, as
shown in Figure 5-4. On the client side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is
used. The matched FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 5-3 and
Figure 5-2 respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 5-2.

5-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Table 5-2 Classification of fiber connector


Internal fiber connector Description
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

E2000/APC Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8°)

FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished

1. LC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 LC/PC optical interface

The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation


instead of rotation.
When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of
the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber
with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber
connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.

2. SC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 5-2.

5-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Figure 5-2 SC/PC Optical interface

3. FC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 FC/PC optical interface

4. E2000/APC Optical Interface

The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 5-4.

5-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Figure 5-4 E2000/APC optical interface

5.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable


The OptiX OSN 3500 power cables and grounding cables include.
„ cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND power cable
„ Cabinet door grounding cable
„ Subrack power cable
„ HUB/COA power cable
5.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable

–48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the
equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power
distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end
connects to the power distribution box at the cabinet top.

1. Structure

The structure of the –48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in
Figure 5-5. PGND power cable is shown in Figure 5-6.

1 2

1. Naked connector 2. Naked connector-OT type 3. Cable tie


Figure 5-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable

5-5
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

1. Naked connector-OT type 2. Cable tie 3. Naked connector


4. Heat-shrink tube 5. Main tag 6. Wire
7. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 5-6 Cabinet PGND power cable

2. Pin Assignment

None.

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
–48 V cabinet Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin
power cable plating-naked ring terminal

Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24


mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and


bllue-85A

Cabinet Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin


BGND plating-naked ring terminal
grounding
cable Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted
12 mm deep-80A-green

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and


black-85A

Cabinet Connector 1 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin


PGND plating-naked ring terminal
grounding
cable Connector 3 Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin
plating

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and


green-85A

5-6
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Fireproof level CM

Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

5.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels.

1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 5-7.

1. Naked connector--OT6-6 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Main tag


Figure 5-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

2. Pin Assignment

None.

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin
plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG

Cable Model Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green

Fireproof level CM

Length 350 mm

5-7
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

5.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the power distribution box at the cabinet top and
the PIU board on the subrack, leading the –48 V power supply from the top of the
cabinet to subrack.

1. Structure

The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 5-8.

1. Cable connector 2. Main tag 3. Cable tie 4. Tag 5. Common connector


Figure 5-8 Structure of the subrack power cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
Cable connector Bare connector Relationship Core color
X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2 Blue (–48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3 Black (power ground)

3. Technical Parameters
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female

Common connector X2/X3 Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth


10mm-gray

Cable Model Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is


blue and black)-41A

Number of 2
cores

5-8
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Parameter
Fireproof level CM

Color Blue or black

Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

5.2.4 HUB/COA Power Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500 PIU board can supply -48V power to up to two pieces of
external equipment (such as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects
power port on PIU and the power port of external equipment.
Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end
connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external
equipment (HUB or COA).

1. Structure

The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 5-9.


1
A-A A 3
B
3 1 W1

4 2 X1
A 2

W2 X3

X2

W1.1
W1
B W1.2 X3
W2.1

W2
W2.2

1. Common connector-female 2. Plug-4PIN 3. Main tag


A-A. Sectional view in A direction
Figure 5-9 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 5-4.

5-9
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable


Connector X1, X2 Cable W1, W2 Color Connector X3
X1.1 W1.1 Brown X3.1

X2.1 W2.1

X1.3 W1.2 Black X3.3

X2.3 W2.2

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X3 Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm

Connector X1/X2 Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length

W1/W2 cable model Twisted pair-0Ω-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black

Number of cores 2

Fireproof level CM

Color Black

Length 1800 mm

5.3 Alarm Cable


This section introduces the OptiX OSN 3500 alarm cables, including:
„ Cabinet indicator cable
„ Indicator/Alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
„ Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
„ Boolean input/output cable
5.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to
cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet
indicator.

1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 5-10.

5-10
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction


Figure 5-10 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable
Connector X1 Connector Color Relationship Function Label print
X2,/X3/ X4/ X5
X1.4 X2.2 White Pair RALMP Green

X1.5 X2.1 Green RALMN

X1.1 X3.2 White Pair YALMP Red

X1.2 X3.1 Blue YALMN

X1.3 X4.2 White Pair GRUNP Orange

X1.6 X4.1 Brown GRUNN

X1.7 X5.2 White Pair WALMP Yellow

X1.8 X5.1 Orange WALMN

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

Connector Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm


X2/X3/X4/X5

Cable model Twisted pair cable-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

5-11
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Fireproof level CM

Core diameter 0.5 mm

Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

5.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks

The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively


concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or
different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end
connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of the AUX board on one subrack and the
other end to LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of the AUX board on another subrack.

1. Structure

The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is


shown in Figure 5-11.

1. Network port 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A


connector – RJ-45 direction
Figure 5-11 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN


subracks is shown in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
Connector Connector Relationship Alarm output Indicator
X1 X2 function
X1.1 X2.1 Pair EMERGENCY ALARM + YALMP

X1.2 X2.2 EMERGENCY ALARM - YALMN

X1.3 X2.3 Pair MAIN ALARM + GRUNP

X1.6 X2.6 MAIN ALARM - GRUNN

5-12
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Connector Connector Relationship Alarm output Indicator


X1 X2 function
X1.4 X2.4 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ RALMP

X1.5 X2.5 AUXILIARY ALARM 1- RALMN

X1.7 X2.7 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ WALMP

X1.8 X2.8 AUXILIARY ALARM 2- WALMN

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Core diameter 0.5 mm

Length 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

5.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack

The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to
concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment and
non OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, OptiX OSN 9500) of
Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or
ALMO2 interface of the AUX board on the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and the other
end to the alarm output or alarm concatenating interface of other equipment.

1. Structure

The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other
subrack is shown in Figure 5-12.

5-13
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

1. Network port 2. Main tag 3. Tag 1 4. Cable connector-D type 9


connector - RJ45 PINs-female
L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
Figure 5-12 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and
other subrack is shown in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Relationship
X1.1 X2.7 Pair EMERGENCY ALARM +

X1.2 X2.3 EMERGENCY ALARM -

X1.3 X2.6 Pair MAIN ALARM +

X1.6 X2.1 MAIN ALARM -

X1.4 X2.8 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 1+

X1.5 X2.4 AUXILIARY ALARM 1-

X1.7 X2.9 Pair AUXILIARY ALARM 2+

X1.8 X2.5 AUXILIARY ALARM 2-

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female

5-14
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE
430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Core diameter 0.5 mm

Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

5.3.4 Boolean Input/Output Cable

The Boolean input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external equipment into the
OptiX OSN 3500 and the output cable outputs the alarm signal of the OptiX OSN
3500 to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment.
One end of the Boolean input/output cable connects to the Boolean input/output
interface of the AUX board through an RJ-45 connector and the other end connects
to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. Make the
connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can provide 4 channels
transmission for Boolean input/output.

1. Structure

The structure of the Boolean input/output cable is shown in Figure 5-13.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction
Figure 5-13 Structure of the Boolean input/output cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the Boolean input/output cable is shown in Table 5-8.

5-15
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Table 5-8 Pin assignment of Boolean input/output cable


Connector Color Relationship Alarm output Alarm input
X1
X1.1 Blue Pair EMERGENCY SW_INPUT 1+
ALARM +

X1.2 White EMERGENCY SW_INPUT 1-


ALARM -

X1.3 Orange Pair MAIN ALARM + SW_INPUT 2+

X1.6 White MAIN ALARM - SW_INPUT 2-

X1.4 Green Pair AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 3+


1+

X1.5 White AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 3-


1-

X1.7 Brown Pair AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 4+


2+

X1.8 White AUXILIARY ALARM SW_INPUT 4-


2-

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
ConnectorX1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Core diameter 0.5 mm

Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

5-16
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

5.4 Management Cable


5.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the
OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the
OAM interface of the AUX board. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to
the laptop computer, serial NM or modem.

1. Structure

The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 5-14

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB25 male


A-A. Sectional view in A direction
B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 5-14 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 5-9.
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.2 X2.20 Single DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

X1.3 X2.2 Single TD (Transmit Data)

X1.6 X2.3 Single RD (Receive Data)

X1.4 X2.7 Pair SG (Signaling Ground)

X1.5

5-17
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male

Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 5000 mm

5.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable

The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for:


„ transparent transmission of environment detection data signal
„ management of external devices like COA
One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 1–4 interfaces or
F&f serial interface on the AUX board, and the other end uses DB9 connector,
connected to external detection equipment or external equipment.

1. Structure

The structure of the Serial 1–S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 5-15.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB9 male


A-A. Sectional view in A direction
B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 5-15 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

5-18
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the Serial 1–4/F&f cable is shown in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.3 X2.6 Pair TX +

X1.6 X2.7 TX -

X1.1 X2.8 Pair RX +

X1.2 X2.9 RX -

X1.5 X2.5 Pair SG

X1.4 X2.3 232RX

X1.8 X2.2 Single 232TX

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male

Cable model (1) Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

(2) Twisted pair-100 Ω-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black

Number of 8
cores

Fireproof level CM

Length Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m

5.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable

The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling


between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to
the RS-232/422 serial port of the AUX, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial
port of other NE.

5-19
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

1. Structure

The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 5-16.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag


A-A. Sectional view in A direction
Figure 5-16 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.3 X2.1 Pair RX +

X1.6 X2.2 RX -

X1.1 X2.3 Pair TX +

X1.2 X2.6 TX -

X1.5 X2.5 Pair SG

X1.4 X2.8 232RX

X1.8 X2.4 Single 232TX

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector

Model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 430U

5-20
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 15 m

5.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Wire

The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11
connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface of the AUX board and the
other end to the interface of the orderwire phone

1. Structure

The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 5-17.

1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug 2. Main tag


Figure 5-17 Structure of ordinary telephone wire

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 5-12.
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.1 X2.1 No connected

X1.2 X2.2 No connected

X1.3 X2.3 TIP

X1.4 X2.4 RING

X1.5 X2.5 No connected

X1.6 X2.6 No connected

5-21
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG

Cable model Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08


mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core telephone wire

Number of cores 2

Fireproof level CM

Length 15 m

5.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is
required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected
to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.

1. Structure

The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 5-18.

1. Cable connector-DB9 male 2. Main tag


Figure 5-18 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table
5-13.

5-22
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Table 5-13 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Remark
3 2 A pair

2 3

5 5 Grounding

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male

Cable model Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey

Number of cores 2 pairs

Fireproof level CM

Length 0.6 m, 2.5 m

5.4.6 Straight Through Cable

The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:


„ Connect the OptiX OSN 3500 and HUB.
„ Connect HUB and NM computer
„ Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment
Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the
equipment at two ends respectively.

1. Structure

The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 5-19.

5-23
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Tag 2


Figure 5-19 Structure of straight through cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 5-14.
Table 5-14 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model
connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable

Cable model Communication cable-100±15 Ω-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8


cores-PANTONE 445U

Number of cores 8

5-24
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Fireproof level CM

Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

5.4.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN 3500.
Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected to the ETH
interface of the AUX board, and the other end to the network port of the compute.

1. Structure

The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 5-20.

1. Network port connector RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Network cable 5. Tag 2
Figure 5-20 Structure of the crossover cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 5-15.


Table 5-15 Pin assignment of crossover cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.2 X2.6 Green Pair

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

5-25
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model
connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable

Model Communication cable-100±15Ω-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores


PANTONE 646U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 5 m, 30 m

5.5 Signal Cable


5.5.1 75 Ω E1 Cable

The 75 Ω E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signal. One end uses DB44 connector,
connected to the 75 Ω E1 PDH interface board. The other end is connected to DDF.
The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1
signals.

1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω E1 cable is shown in Figure 5-21.

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked: ”W1 (E1:1 to 4)”


3. Tag 3, marked: “W2 (E1:5 to 8)” 4. Main tag
Figure 5-21 Structure of the 75 Ω E1 cable

5-26
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 75 Ω E1 cable is shown in Table 5-16.


Table 5-16 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω E1 cable
PIN of Cable W1 PIN of Cable W2
DB44 Core Series Remark DB44 Core Series Remark
NO. NO.
38 Ring 1 R1 34 Ring 1 R5

23 Tip 19 Tip

37 Ring 3 R2 33 Ring 3 R6

22 Tip 18 Tip

36 Ring 5 R3 32 Ring 5 R7

21 Tip 17 Tip

35 Ring 7 R4 31 Ring 7 R8

20 Tip 16 Tip

15 Ring 2 T1 11 Ring 2 T5

30 Tip 26 Tip

14 Ring 4 T2 10 Ring 4 T6

29 Tip 25 Tip

13 Ring 6 T3 9 Ring 6 T7

28 Tip 24 Tip

12 Ring 8 T4 8 Ring 8 T8

27 Tip 7 Tip

Shell Out braid of whole cable & ring Shell Out braid of whole cable &
of each coax ring of each coax

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

Cable model Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2


(W1/W2) mm-0.252 mm-white

Fireproof level CM

Number of cores 8 x E1

5-27
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Diameter cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor
diameter 0.252mm

Length 3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m

Caution:
The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable.
Be sure not to discard it before installation

5.5.2 120Ω E1 Cable

The 120 Ω E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44
connector, connected to 120 Ω E1 PDH interface board. The other end is connected
to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can
transmit eight E1 signals.

1. Structure

The structure of the 120 Ω E1 cable is shown in Figure 5-22.

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX1~8)"


3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX1~8)" 4. Main tag
Figure 5-22 Structure of the 120 Ω E1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω E1 cable is shown in Table 5-17.

5-28
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Table 5-17 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω E1 cable


PIN of Cable W1 Remark PIN of Cable W2 Remark
DB44 Core Series DB44 Core Series
NO. NO.
15 Blue Pair Tx1 38 Blue Pair Rx1

30 White 23 White

14 Orange Pair Tx2 37 Orange Pair Rx2

29 White 22 White

13 Green Pair Tx3 36 Green Pair Rx3

28 White 21 White

12 Brown Pair Tx4 35 Brown Pair Rx4

27 White 20 White

11 Grey Pair Tx5 34 Grey Pair Rx5

26 White 19 White

10 Blue Pair Tx6 33 Blue Pair Rx6

25 Red 18 Red

9 Orange Pair Tx7 32 Orange Pair Rx7

24 Red 17 Red

8 Green Pair Tx8 31 Green Pair Rx8

7 Red 16 Red

Shell Out braid of whole cable Shell Out braid of whole cable

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

Model Communication cable-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16


cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 16

Inner conductor 0.5 mm


diameter

Fireproof level CM

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m

5-29
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

5.5.3 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/DS3/STM-1 signal. One end


uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/DS3/STM-1 interface board. The other
end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required.

1. Structure

The structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 5-23.

1. Coaxial connector-SMB 2. Main tag 3. Coaxial cable


Figure 5-23 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

None.

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female

Cable I Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded

Diameter cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1


mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

Cable II Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4


mm-shielded-grey

Diameter cover diameter 4.4 mm-insulation diameter 2.4


mm-conductor diameter 0.4 mm

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m

Cable III Model Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey

Diameter cover diameter 6.7 mm-insulation diameter 3.8


mm-conductor diameter 0.61 mm

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m

Cable IV Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black

5-30
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Item Description
Diameter cover diameter 5.80 mm-insulation diameter 3.71
mm-conductor diameter 0.643 mm

Length 30 m

Fireproof level CM

5.5.4 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1


services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the
service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the
cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main
subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board.

1. Structure

The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure
5-24.
2 1

1 2

X1 X2

1. PIN#1 2. PIN#26
Figure 5-24 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in
Table 5-18.
Table 5-18 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
Pin Core and serial number
1 Core 1

14

5-31
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

Pin Core and serial number


2 Ground

15 Core 2

16 Ground

4 Core 3

17

5 Ground

18 Core 4

19 Ground

9 Core 5

21

8 Ground

23 Core 6

10

22 Ground

12 Core 7

24

11 Ground

26 Core 8

13

25 Ground

7 Core 9

20

X1/X2 enclosure Ground

5-32
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN
male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG

Cable model Communication Cable-100Ω-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey

Number of cores 8P+1P

Fireproof level CM

Length 3 m, 5 m, 7 m, 8 m, 10 m

5.6 Clock Cable


5.6.1 Clock Cable

The clock cable includes 75 Ω clock cable and 120 Ω clock cable, used for
inputting/outputting external clock signal.
For the 75 Ω clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required
For the 120 Ω clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 Ω clock cable
can input/output two clock signals.

1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω and 120 Ω clock cables is respectively shown in Figure
5-25 and Figure 5-26.

1. Coaxial connector -SMB 2. Tag


Figure 5-25 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable

5-33
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable 3. Main tag


4. Network port connector-RJ-45
Figure 5-26 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable is shown in Table 5-19.
Table 5-19 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable
X1 W Remark
X1.1 Blue W1

X1.2 White

X1.4 Orange W2

X1.5 White

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
75 Ω Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female
clock
cable Cable Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34
mm-shielded

Diameter cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1


mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

120 Ω Connector X1 Network interface


clock cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector
cable
Cable Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4
mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

Conductor 0.4 mm/26AWG


diameter

Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m

5-34
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

5.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable

The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock cables.

1. Structure

The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cables is shown
in Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 respectively.

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Main tag


3. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB
Figure 5-27 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Tag 1:“1#” 3. Tag 2:“2#” 4. Main tag


5. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB 6. Tag 3:“1#” 7. Tag 4:“2#”
Figure 5-28 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable is shown in
Table 5-20.
Table 5-20 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable
Connector 75 Ω cable Color 120 Ω cable
X1 Core Blue W3

Shielding layer White

X2 Core Blue W4

Shielding layer White

5-35
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual 5 Cables

3. Technical Parameters
Item Description
1-channel Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female

75 Ω Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34


cable mm-shielded

Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1


mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

120 Ω Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4


cable mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

Conductor 0.4 mm/26AWG


diameter

Length 30 m

2-channel X1/X2 connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female

75 Ω Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34


cable mm-shielded

Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1


mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

120 Ω Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4


cable mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

Conductor 0.4 mm/26AWG


diameter

Length 30 m

5-36
OptiX OSN 3500 A Indicator Description for
Hardware Description Manual Equipment and Board

A Indicator Description for


Equipment and Board

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description


Indicator Status Description
Power indicator - Normal (green) On The cabinet is powered on.

Off The cabinet is not powered on.

Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red) On There is a critical alarm.

Off There is no critical alarm.

Major alarm indicator - Major (orange) On There is a major alarm.

Off There is no major alarm.

Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow) On There is a minor alarm.

Off There is no minor alarm.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-1
OptiX OSN 3500 A Indicator Description for
Hardware Description Manual Equipment and Board

A.2 Board Indicator Description


1. Board Hardware Indicator - STAT
Status Description
On, green The board works normally.

On, red The board hardware fails.

On for 100ms and off for The board hardware is mismatched.


100ms alternately, red

Off The board is not power on.

2. Service Activation Indicator - ACT


Status Description
On, green The service is activated, and the board is in service.

Off The board is not in service.

3. Board Software Indicator - PROG


Status Description
On, green The board software or software for FPGA is
uploaded successfully, or the board software is
initialized successfully.

On for 100ms and off for The board software or software for FPGA is being
100ms alternatively, green uploaded.

On for 300ms and off for The board software is initializing, and is in BIOS boot
300ms alternatively, green stage.

On, red The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or is


failed in uploading or in initializing.

Off No power supply.

4. Service Alarm Indicator - SRV


Status Description
On, green Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-2
OptiX OSN 3500 A Indicator Description for
Hardware Description Manual Equipment and Board

5. Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator of the SCC


Indicator name Status Description
Indicator for –48 V On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal.
power supply A
(PWRA) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or
failed).

Indicator for –48 V On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal.
power supply B
(PWRB) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or
failed).

Indicator for +3.3 V On, green The +3.3 V protection power is normal.
power supply C
(PWRC) On, red The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

Alarm cut indicator On, yellow Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status.
(ALMC)
Off Give sound warning upon alarm.

6. Ethernet Indicators of the SCC and AUX


Indicator name Status Description
LINK indicator On Link between network cable and equipment is
(Green) established.

Off Link between network cable and equipment is


not established.

ACT indicator On There is data transmitted/received.


(Orange)
Off There is no data transmitted/received.

7. Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board


Status Description Remark
The green and yellow The Ethernet cable is not -
indicator is off. connected.

The green indicator is on, The Ethernet cable is -


and the yellow indicator connected, but no data is
does not flash. transmitted.

The green indicator is on, The Ethernet cable is The flashing frequency of
and the yellow indicator connected, and data is yellow indicator depends on
flashes. transmitted. the transmission of Ethernet
data.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual B Power Consumption and Weight

B Power Consumption and Weight

Board Power Weight (kg) Board Power Weight (kg)


consumption consumption
(W) (W)
SL64/ 32 1.12 TSB8 5 0.28
SF64

SL16 20 1.10 TSB4 2.5 0.28

SLQ4 16 1.04 EGS2 39 1.04

SLD4 15 1.01 EGT2 23 0.90

SL4 15 1.00 EFS0 33 0.98

SLQ1 15 1.04 EFS4 33 0.98

SL1 14 1.00 EMR0 50 1.20

BA2 20 1.01 ETF8 2 0.37

BPA 20 1.01 ETS8 2 0.37

DCU 0 0.42 EFF8 6 0.44

SEP1 17 0.95 ADL4 35 0.90

EU08 11 0.41 ADQ1 35 0.95

OU08 6 0.41 GXCSA 27 1.81

EU04 6 0.40 EXCSA 62 2.00

SPQ4 24 0.91 UXCS 65 2.00

MU04 2 0.41 XCE 25 1.50

PD3 19 1.12 SCC 10 0.88

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

B-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual B Power Consumption and Weight

Board Power Weight (kg) Board Power Weight (kg)


consumption consumption
(W) (W)
PL3 15 1.00 AUX 19 0.96

D34S 2 0.38 FAN 30 1.50

C34S 2 0.31 PIU 8 1.15

PQM 22 1.01 MR2A 0 1.01

PQ1 19 1.01 MR2C 0 1.01

D75S 5.5 0.35 LWX 30 1.10

D12S 9 0.35 61COA 10 3.50

D12B 1 0.31 62COA 75 8.00

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

B-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual C Abbreviations and Acronyms

C Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Full name


A

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

APS ATM Protection Switch

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Continuity Check

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

COA Case-shaped Optical Amplifier

CPU Center Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual C Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Full name


DDF Digital Distribution Frame

DTR Data Terminal Ready

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

FC Fiber Channel

FE Fast Ethernet

FICON Fiber Connection

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code

HDLC High level Data Link Control

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual C Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Full name


ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB LoopBack

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

MPLS Multi-protocol Label Switch

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

NA Not applicable

NRZ Non Return to Zero

OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

PA nylon(polyamide); polyamide bar; Power Amplifier;


Project Accounting; Project Administrator; Protocol
Adapter

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

RD Receive Data

RAM Random-access Memory

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

SG Signaling Ground

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SSM Synchronization Status Marker

TD Transmit Data

TDA Tone & Data Access Unit

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual C Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Full name


TPS Tributary Protection Switching

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

VBR Variable Bit Rate

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VPN Virtual Private Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

Index

principle, 4-132
Numerics technical parameter, 4-137

1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 4-39


1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 4-32 B
120 Ω E1 cable, 5-28 BA2
1-channel clock transfer cable, 5-35 application, 4-102
2-channel clock transfer cable, 5-35 front panel, 4-104
75 Ω E1 cable, 5-26 function, 4-102
indicator, 4-104
A interface, 4-105
principle, 4-103
abbreviation, C-1 technical parameter, 4-105
acronym, C-1 BGND power cable, 5-5
ACT. see service activation indicator board
ADL4 appearance, 4-2
front panel, 4-89 indicator (summary table), A-2
function, 4-87 power consumption (summary table), B-1
indicator, 4-89 weight (summary table), B-1
interface, 4-90 board hardware indicator, A-2
parameter configuration, 4-90 board software indicator, A-2
principle, 4-87 Boolean input/output cable, 5-15
technical parameter, 4-91 BPA
ADQ1 application, 4-102
front panel, 4-89 front panel, 4-104
function, 4-87 function, 4-102
indicator, 4-89 indicator, 4-104
interface, 4-90 interface, 4-105
parameter configuration, 4-90 principle, 4-103
principle, 4-87 technical parameter, 4-105
technical parameter, 4-91
alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and
other subrack, 5-13 C
alarm cut indicator, A-3 C2. see signal label byte
architecture,equipment, 1-1 C34S. see also PL3
AUX cabinet
communication module, 4-133 configuration, 2-3
DIP switch and jumper, 4-137 ETSI cabinet, 2-1
front panel, 4-133 indicator, 2-4
function, 4-132 indicator (summary table), A-1
indicator, 4-134 power distribution unit, 2-4
interface, 4-135 size, 2-5
interface module, 4-133 technical parameter, 2-5
power module, 4-133

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-1
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

type, 2-1 dispersion compensation board


weight, 2-5 DCU, 4-116
cabinet door grounding cable, 5-7
cabinet indicator cable, 5-10
cable technical parameter
E
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 5-36 E1 interface board
–48 V cabinet power cable, 5-6 D75S, 4-49
75 Ω E1 cable, 5-27 E1 processing board
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and PQ1, 4-49
other subrack, 5-14 E1/T1 interface board
Boolean input/output cable, 5-16 D12B, 4-49
cabinet BGND power cable, 5-6 D12S, 4-49
cabinet door grounding cable, 5-7 E1/T1 processing board
cabinet indicator cable, 5-11 PQM, 4-49
cabinet PGND power cable, 5-6 E2000/APC optical interface, 5-4
clock cable, 5-34 E3/DS3 interface switching board
COA concatenating cable, 5-23 C34S, 4-42
crossover cable, 5-26 D34S, 4-42
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 5-30 E3/DS3 processing board
extended subrack service connection cable, 5-33 PD3, 4-42
HUB/COA power cable, 5-10 PL3, 4-42
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 5-30
subracks, 5-13 E4/STM-1 processing board
OAM serial port cable, 5-18 SPQ4, 4-35
RS-232/422 serial port cable, 5-20 EFF8. see also EFS0
serial 1–4/f&f cable, 5-19 EFS0
straight through cable, 5-24 front panel, 4-72
subrack power cable, 5-8 function, 4-69
telephone wire, 5-22 indicator, 4-73
clock cable, 5-33 interface board, 4-74
COA parameter configuration, 4-76
62COA, 4-107 principle, 4-70
front panel, 4-109 technical parameter, 4-77
installation slot, 4-113 EFS4
MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 4-112 front panel, 4-72
power interface, 4-113 function, 4-69
principle, 4-108 indicator, 4-73
RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 4-112 interface, 4-74
technical specification, 4-114 parameter configuration, 4-76
COA concatenating cable, 5-22 principle, 4-70
connector technical parameter, 4-77
E2000/APC, 4-111 EGS2
cross-connect & synchronous timing board front panel, 4-59
EXCS, 4-120 function, 4-56
GXCS, 4-120 indicator, 4-59
UXCS, 4-120 interface, 4-61
XCE, 4-120 parameter configuration, 4-61
crossover cable, 5-25 principle, 4-58
technical parameter, 4-62
D EGT2
front panel, 4-65
D12B. see also PQ1 function, 4-63
D12S. see also PQ1 indicator, 4-65
D34S. see also PD3 interface, 4-66
D75S. see also PQ1 parameter configuration, 4-67
DCU principle, 4-63
application, 4-116 technical parameter, 4-67
front panel, 4-117 ejector lever, 4-3
function, 4-116 EMR0
interface, 4-118 front panel, 4-82
principle, 4-117 function, 4-79
technical parameter, 4-119 indicator, 4-82

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-2
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

interface, 4-84 parameter configuration, 4-125


parameter configuration, 4-84 principle, 4-121
principle, 4-80 technical parameter, 4-125
specification, 4-78
technical parameter, 4-85
equipment architecture, 1-1
H
ETF8. see also EFS0 HUB/COA power cable, 5-9
Ethernet indicator
ACT indicator, A-3
LINK indicator, A-3 I
Ethernet port indicator, A-3 indicator
Ethernet ring processing board alarm cut indicator, A-3
EMR0, 4-78 board hardware indicator, A-2
ETS8. see also EFS0 board software indicator, A-2
ETSI cabinet cabinet, 2-4
appearance, 2-1 cabinet (summary table), A-1
EU04. see also SEP1 Ethernet indicator, A-3
EU08. see also SEP1 Ethernet port indicator, A-3
EXCS power monitoring indicator, A-3
front panel, 4-122 service activation indicator, A-2
function, 4-120 service alarm indicator, A-2
indicator, 4-122 indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN
interface, 4-123 subracks, 5-12
parameter configuration, 4-125 interface switching & bridging board
principle, 4-121 TSB4, 4-26
technical parameter, 4-125 TSB8, 4-26
extended subrack service connection cable, 5-31

J
F
J1. see path trace byte
FAN
fan control, 4-142
fan power, 4-142 L
function, 4-141
LC/PC optical interface, 5-3
indicator, 4-142
LWX
principle, 4-142
front panel, 4-94
technical parameter, 4-143
function, 4-92
fan control board
indicator, 4-94
FAN, 4-141
interface, 4-95
fan tray assembly. see FAN
principle, 4-93
FC/PC optical interface, 5-4
technical parameter, 4-96
FE interface board
EFF8, 4-68
ETF8, 4-68 M
FE processing board
EFS0, 4-68 MR2A/MR2C
EFS4, 4-68 front panel, 4-99
FE switching and bridging board function, 4-98
ETS8, 4-68 interface, 4-100
fiber jumper. see tail fiber principle, 4-99
technical parameter, 4-101
MU04. see also SPQ4
G
GE processing board O
EGS2, 4-56
GE transparent transmission board OAM serial port cable, 5-17
EGT2, 4-63 optical add/drop multiplexing board
GXCS MR2A/MR2C, 4-98
front panel, 4-122 optical booster & pre-amplifier
function, 4-120 BPA, 4-102
indicator, 4-122 optical booster amplifier
interface, 4-123 BA2, 4-102

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-3
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

OU08. see also SEP1 power monitoring indicator, A-3


PQ1
front panel, 4-51
P function, 4-49
path trace byte, 4-7 indicator, 4-51
PD3 interface board, 4-53
front panel, 4-44 parameter configuration, 4-55
function, 4-42 principle, 4-50
indicator, 4-45 protection configuration, 4-53
interface, 4-46 technical parameter, 4-55
parameter configuration, 4-48 PQM
principle, 4-42 front panel, 4-51
protection configuration, 4-46 function, 4-49
technical parameter, 4-48 indicator, 4-51
PGND power cable, 5-5 interface board, 4-53
pin assignment parameter configuration, 4-55
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 5-35 principle, 4-50
120 Ω E1 cable, 5-28 protection configuration, 4-53
75 Ω E1 cable, 5-27 technical parameter, 4-55
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and PROG. see board software indicator
other subrack, 5-14 PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator
Boolean input/output cable, 5-15
cabinet indicator cable, 5-11 R
clock cable, 5-34
COA concatenating cable, 5-22 RJ-45 interface, 4-74
crossover cable, 5-25 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 5-19
extended subrack service connection cable, 5-31
HUB/COA power cable, 5-9 S
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN
subracks, 5-12 SC/PC optical interface, 5-3
OAM serial port cable, 5-17 SCC
RS-232/422 serial port cable, 5-20 communication module, 4-127
serial 1–4/F&f cable, 5-19 control module, 4-127
straight through cable, 5-24 front panel, 4-128
subrack power cable, 5-8 function, 4-126
telephone wire, 5-21 indicator, 4-130
PIU interface, 4-131
filter unit, 4-138 power monitoring module, 4-128
front panel, 4-139 principle, 4-127
function, 4-138 switch, 4-129
lightning protection unit, 4-138 technical parameter, 4-131
power access unit, 4-138 SEP1
principle, 4-138 1:N TPS protection, 4-32
technical parameter, 4-140 front panel, 4-29
PL3 function, 4-27
front panel, 4-44 indicator, 4-29
function, 4-42 interface, 4-30
indicator, 4-45 parameter configuration, 4-33
interface, 4-46 principle, 4-27
parameter configuration, 4-48 technical parameter, 4-34
principle, 4-42 serial 1–4/F&f cable, 5-18
protection configuration, 4-46 service activation indicator, A-2
technical parameter, 4-48 service alarm indicator, A-2
power consumption signal label byte, 4-8
board (summary table), B-1 size
power distribution unit cabinet, 2-5
appearance, 2-4 subrack, 3-8
wiring relation, 2-5 SL1 board
power interface front panel, 4-23
COA, 4-113 function, 4-21
power interface board indicator, 4-23
PIU, 4-138 interface, 4-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-4
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

parameter configuration, 4-24 SPQ4, 4-35


principle, 4-22 STM-16 optical processing board
technical parameter, 4-25 SL16 board, 4-9
SL16 board STM-4 ATM service processing board
front panel, 4-11 ADL4, 4-86
function, 4-9 STM-4 optical processing board
indicator, 4-12 SL4 board, 4-15
interface, 4-13 SLD4 board, 4-15
parameter configuration, 4-14 SLQ4 board, 4-15
principle, 4-10 STM-64 processing board
technical parameter, 4-14 SL64/SF64 board, 4-3
SL4 board straight through cable, 5-23
front panel, 4-18 subrack
function, 4-16 front view, 3-1
indicator, 4-18 size, 3-8
interface, 4-19 slot assignment, 3-3
parameter configuration, 4-19 structure, 3-2
principle, 4-16 technical parameter, 3-7
technical parameter, 4-20 weight, 3-8
SL64 board subrack power cable, 5-8
front panel, 4-5 system auxiliary interface board
function, 4-3 AUX, 4-132
indicator, 4-6 system control & communication board
interface, 4-7 SCC, 4-126
parameter configuration, 4-7
principle, 4-4
technical parameters, 4-8
T
slot assignment tail fiber, 5-1
for board, 3-4 technical parameter
relation between processing & interface board, 3-3 120 Ω E1 cable, 5-29
SLQ1 board cabinet, 2-5
front panel, 4-23 subrack, 3-7
function, 4-21 technical specification
indicator, 4-23 COA, 4-114
interface, 4-24 telephone wire, 5-21
parameter configuration, 4-24 TPS protection
principle, 4-22 1:N, 4-32, 4-39
technical parameter, 4-25 TSB4. see also SEP1 and SPQ4
SPQ4 TSB8. see also SEP1
1:N TPS protection, 4-39
front panel, 4-37
function, 4-35 U
indicator, 4-37 UXCS
interface, 4-38 front panel, 4-122
parameter configuration, 4-40 function, 4-120
principle, 4-36 indicator, 4-122
technical parameter, 4-41 interface, 4-123
SRV. see service alarm indicator parameter configuration, 4-125
STAT. see board hardware indicator principle, 4-121
STM-1 ATM service processing board technical parameter, 4-125
ADQ1, 4-86
STM-1 interface board
EU04, 4-26 W
EU08, 4-26
MU04, 4-35 wavelength conversion board
OU08, 4-26 LWX, 4-92
STM-1 optical processing board weight
SL1 board, 4-21 board (summary table), B-1
SLQ1 board, 4-21 cabinet, 2-5
STM-1 optical/electrical processing board subrack, 3-8
SEP1, 4-26
STM-1/E4 processing board

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-5
OptiX OSN 3500
Hardware Description Manual Index

X indicator, 4-122
interface, 4-123
XCE parameter configuration, 4-125
front panel, 4-122 technical parameter, 4-125
function, 4-120

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

i-6

S-ar putea să vă placă și